OEZ - Circuit Breaker

www.oez.
com
Moulded case circuit breakers

Any changes reserved
Modeion
MO01-2017-EN
OEZ s.r.o.
Šedivská 339
561 51 Letohrad
Czech Republic
tel.: +420 465 672 111
+420 465 672 101
fax: +420 465 672 398
+420 465 672 151
e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com
www.oez.com
www.oez.com
Moulded case circuit breakers Modeion
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................................................................................A
BC160N .............................................................................................................................................................D
BD250N, BD250S ...........................................................................................................................................E
BH630N, BH630S ...........................................................................................................................................F
BL1000S ...........................................................................................................................................................G
BL1600S ...........................................................................................................................................................H
ACCESSORIES OF MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS..........................................................................P
OTHER TECHNICAL PARAMETERS...............................................................................................................R
GLOSSARY .........................................................................................................................................................S
INDEX .................................................................................................................................................................T
Modeion Moulded case circuit breakers
LONG-TERM EXPERIENCE
More than 75 years of circuit breakers production

Production proven by years of experience.
Constant innovations of production processes.
Quality Management System ISO 9001, Environmental Management System ISO 14001.
Own development
Long-term tradition.
Own production technology.
A2
Own testing lab

World-class testing lab.
Precise system of device testing.
Customer service
Expert consulting from experienced technicians.
We develop and use intuitive SW programs to facilitate work selection,
ordering and product assembly that we also provide to our customers.
A3
CORE OF THE SWITCHBOARD
Reliability
Modeion circuit breaker is an imaginary core
of the switchboard.
Reliably supply all circuits of the switchboard.
Persistence
Modeion circuit breakers operate persistently without failures regardless the environment or load.
Modeion circuit breakers ensure smooth operation of transformer sub-stations and production lines.
A4
DEMANDING APPLICATIONS
Remote controlled standby sources

Safe operation control by automatically controlled standby sources or manual sources switching.
Possibility of mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers.
Demanding working conditions

Circuit breakers tested to work in mines, steelworks, on mobile cranes,
in gravel pits, sand pits, cement plants and chemical plants.
A5
EASY CONNECTION
Simple work for an electrician

It is possible to connect circuit breakers directly
as busbars, flexibars, cables or using cable lugs.
For all commonly used copper and aluminum
busbars and flexibars.
Additional covers for covering of busbars and cables
connections for circuit breakers size up to 630 A.
Besides the standard connection directly to the
circuit breaker it is possible to choose from a wide
range of connecting sets for a direct connection
of conductors according to the needs.
It is possible to connect more cables directly to the
circuit breakers.
Connection of switchboard with four aluminum
cables 240 mm2 can be carried out by a single
electrician.
A6
Quick direct connection of Cu/Al cables

Connecting sets enable quick connection of cables
without cable lugs.
Connection is carried out by means of simple or multiple
terminal blocks.
Suitable for copper and aluminum cables
with cross-section from 2.5 mm2 up to 300 mm2.
Circuit breakers size 630 A can be connected
up to 3 cables with cross-section 240 mm2.
Circuit breakers size 1 000 A and 1 600 A up to 4 cables
with cross-section 300 mm2.
Parameters for circuit breakers connection can be found
on page D18, E19, F19, H13.
A7
UNIVERSAL SOLUTION
Clear type designation

Easily memorable type designation.
Easy selection and order.
Type designation Rated current

BC160 160 A
BD250 250 A
BH630 630 A
BL1000 1 000 A
BL1600 1 600 A
Best references
Prague Castle.
Škoda Auto.
ČEZ, a.s. – Dětmarovice Power Plant.
A8
SPECIFICATIONS TO SELECT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type BC160N BD250N, BD250S BH630N, BH630S BL1000S BL1600S
Rated normal current Iu 160 A 250 A 630 A 1 000 A 1 600 A
Rated operating voltage Ue max. AC 690 V, DC 250 V max. AC 690 V max. AC 690 V max. AC 690 V max. AC 690 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Utilization category (selectivity) A A A A, B A, B
Rated short-circuit ultimate Icu/Ue NORMAL 25 kA / AC 415 V 36 kA / AC 415 V 36 kA / AC 415 V – –

breaking capacity 1) SUPERIOR – 65 kA / AC 415 V 65 kA / AC 415 V 65 kA / AC 415 V 65 kA / AC 415 V
Rated short-time withstand current Icw/t – 2.5 kA /1 s 8 kA / 50 ms, 7 kA / 300 ms, 15 kA / 1 s 20 kA / 1 s

at Ue = AC 690 V 6.5 kA / 1 s
Dimensions W x H x D 75 x 135 x 70 mm 105 x 225 x 105 mm 140 x 275 x 105 mm 210 x 350 x 135 mm 210 x 350 x 135 mm
Number of poles 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3 3
Residual current device z – – – –
Additional cover for overcurrent release – z z – –
Plug-in design – z z – –
Withdrawable design – z z z z
Connection - front/rear z/z z/z z/z z/z z/z
Connection – busbars / cable lugs / cables z/z/z z/z/z z/z/z z/z/z z/z/z
Potential terminals z z z z z
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/–/z/– z/z/z/z z/z/z/z z/z/–/– z/z/–/–
Shunt trip z z z z z
Undervoltage release / with early contact z/– z/z z/z z/– z/–
Hand drive / with adjustable lever z/z z/z z/z z/z z/z
Motor drive / with counter of cycles z/+ z/z z/z z/z z/z
Lever with locking z z z z z
Mechanical interlocking z/– z/z z/z z/z z/z

– for hand drive/with Bowden cable
Terminal cover IP20 z z z z z
z available, – unavailable
1)
In case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change.
A9
NOTE
A10
Modeion
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BC160N
D
Modeion BC160N
COMMERCIAL INFORMATION 3P 4P
Circuit breakers ..........................................................................................................................................................................D4
Switch-disconnectors ........................................................................................................................................................D5, D8
Residual current devices .......................................................................................................................................................D8
Connecting sets for residual current device ..............................................................................................................D9
Residual current monitor .....................................................................................................................................................D9
Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................D9
Connecting sets .......................................................................................................................................................................D10
Mounting sets ...........................................................................................................................................................................D11
Switches........................................................................................................................................................................................D12
Shunt trips ..................................................................................................................................................................................D12
Undervoltage releases .........................................................................................................................................................D12
Delay unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................D13
Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................D13
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................D14
Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................D14
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................D14
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................D15
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................D16
- connecting, mounting ........................................................................................................................D18
- deionization spaces.............................................................................................................................D21
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................D25
Residual current devices

- specifications ......................................................................................................................................D22
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................D23
- connecting, mounting.........................................................................................................................D24
Overcurrent releases
- description, specifications ...................................................................................................................D37
Connecting sets - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D18
Switches - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D43
Shunt trips - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D44
Undervoltage releases
- specifications, diagram .......................................................................................................................D45
Hand drives - description, specifications ...................................................................................................................D46
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching

- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................D47
Motor drives
- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................D48
D2
BC160N Commercial information Modeion
PROPERTIES OF BC160 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Easy connection
Circuit breakers can be connected by means of busbars, flexibars and cables directly
or via cable lugs.
Besides the standard connection directly to the circuit breaker, it is possible to select
from a wide range of connecting sets as needed.
Connection of Cu/Al cable of cross section 2.5 to 120 mm2.
Connection of 2 cables of cross section up to 120 mm2.
Direct connection of all conductors can be done by one electrician.
Connecting sets for quick solution of replacements of previously manufactured OEZ
circuit breakers.
Remote control and signalling

Signalling of all circuit breaker states for use in automation.
Fast and safe circuit breaker switching off by the undervoltage release in 20 ms
- suitable for switching off by the STOP button.
Quick remote switching on of the circuit breaker via motor drive in 70 ms
- trouble-free solution of standby operation.
Control voltage range AC/DC 24 ÷ 230 V.
Local control
For manual control of circuit breakers especially in working machines.
Black or red lever locked in the off position.
Black or yellow bearing - possible combination of yellow bearing and red lever
as the main switch.
Safe control from the front on the switchboard door or from the side of the switchboard.
Safe operation - health protection

Detection of earth-leakage current.
They serve to protect lives, the health of persons and animals and property.
Can be used to inspect the insulation – fire protection.
It is possible to solve the high impedance loop value in the circuit.
D3
Modeion BC160N Commercial information
CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3P
Circuit breaker package includes:

- 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2 1)
- in case of the connection of the fine stranged conductor, we recommend
using of the end sleeve (connecting sets are included in the circuit breaker)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BC-MS01 (2x M3x30)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page D18 as well as deionization
space, see page D21
1)
for connecting in another way, one may use CS-BC-... connecting sets, see page D10, D11
Characteristic D - distribution
protection lines and transformers
In [A] Type Order code IR setting [A] Ii [A] Weight [kg] Package [pc]
16 BC160NT305-16-D OEZ:20209 12.5 ÷ 16 160 ÷ 240 1.00 1
20 BC160NT305-20-D OEZ:20211 16 ÷ 20 200 ÷ 300 1.00 1
25 BC160NT305-25-D OEZ:20212 20 ÷ 25 250 ÷ 375 1.00 1
32 BC160NT305-32-D OEZ:20213 25 ÷ 32 320 ÷ 480 1.00 1
40 BC160NT305-40-D OEZ:20215 32 ÷ 40 200 ÷ 400 1.00 1
50 BC160NT305-50-D OEZ:20217 40 ÷ 50 250 ÷ 500 1.00 1
BC160NT305-160-D
63 BC160NT305-63-D OEZ:20219 50 ÷ 63 315 ÷ 630 1.00 1
80 BC160NT305-80-D OEZ:20222 63 ÷ 80 400 ÷ 800 1.00 1
100 BC160NT305-100-D OEZ:20204 80 ÷ 100 500 ÷ 1 000 1.00 1
125 BC160NT305-125-D OEZ:20206 100 ÷ 125 625 ÷ 1 250 1.00 1
160 BC160NT305-160-D OEZ:20208 125 ÷ 160 800 ÷ 1 600 1.00 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D15, D37
Characteristic M - motor
motors protection
16 BC160NT305-16-M OEZ:20243 12.5 ÷ 16 160 1.00 1
20 BC160NT305-20-M OEZ:20244 16 ÷ 20 200 1.00 1
25 BC160NT305-25-M OEZ:20245 20 ÷ 25 250 1.00 1
32 BC160NT305-32-M OEZ:20246 25 ÷ 32 320 1.00 1
40 BC160NT305-40-M OEZ:20247 32 ÷ 40 400 1.00 1
50 BC160NT305-50-M OEZ:20248 40 ÷ 50 500 1.00 1
63 BC160NT305-63-M OEZ:20249 50 ÷ 63 630 1.00 1
80 BC160NT305-80-M OEZ:20250 63 ÷ 80 800 1.00 1
100 BC160NT305-100-M OEZ:20242 80 ÷ 100 1 000 1.00 1
Characteristic L - lines
protection lines with low starting currents
without IR setting
In [A] Type Order code Ii [A] Weight [kg] Package [pc]
40 BC160NT305-40-L OEZ:20214 160 1.00 1
50 BC160NT305-50-L OEZ:20216 200 1.00 1
63 BC160NT305-63-L OEZ:20218 252 1.00 1
80 BC160NT305-80-L OEZ:20221 320 1.00 1
100 BC160NT305-100-L OEZ:20203 400 1.00 1
125 BC160NT305-125-L OEZ:20205 500 1.00 1
160 BC160NT305-160-L OEZ:20207 640 1.00 1
D4
CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3P
Characteristic N - only short-circuit release

In [A] Type Order code IR [A] Ii [A] Weight [kg] Package [pc]
32 BC160NT305-32-N OEZ:20641 - 160 ÷ 320 1.00 1
40 BC160NT305-40-N OEZ:20642 - 200 ÷ 400 1.00 1
50 BC160NT305-50-N OEZ:20643 - 250 ÷ 500 1.00 1
63 BC160NT305-63-N OEZ:20644 - 315 ÷ 630 1.00 1
80 BC160NT305-80-N OEZ:20645 - 400 ÷ 800 1.00 1
100 BC160NT305-100-N OEZ:20646 - 500 ÷ 1 000 1.00 1
125 BC160NT305-125-N OEZ:20647 - 625 ÷ 1 250 1.00 1
160 BC160NT305-160-N OEZ:20621 - 800 ÷ 1 600 1.00 1
BC160NT305-160-N
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR 3P
Switch-disconnector package includes:

- in case of the connection of the fine stranged conductor, we recommend using
of the end sleeve (connecting sets are included in the circuit breaker)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BC-MS01 (2x M3x30)
1)
Ie [A] Typ Order code Weight [kg] Package [pc]

160 BC160NT305-160-V OEZ:20585 1.00 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D15
BC160NT305-160-V
D5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3P + N

- connecting terminals for connecting cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2 1)
of the end sleeve (connecting terminals are included in the circuit breaker)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42
- 2 sets of mounting bolts OD-BC-MS01 (4x M3x30)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01 (it is installed in the circuit breaker)
space, see page D21
1)
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BC-... connecting sets, see page D10, D11
Characteristic D - distribution 3P + N - for unprotected N conductor
16 BC160NT405-16-D OEZ:33617 12.5 ÷ 16 160 ÷ 240 1.3 1
20 BC160NT405-20-D OEZ:33616 16 ÷ 20 200 ÷ 300 1.3 1
25 BC160NT405-25-D OEZ:33615 20 ÷ 25 250 ÷ 375 1.3 1
32 BC160NT405-32-D OEZ:33614 25 ÷ 32 160 ÷ 320 1.3 1
40 BC160NT405-40-D OEZ:33613 32 ÷ 40 200 ÷ 400 1.3 1
50 BC160NT405-50-D OEZ:33611 40 ÷ 50 250 ÷ 500 1.3 1
BC160NT405-160-D
63 BC160NT405-63-D OEZ:33609 50 ÷ 63 315 ÷ 630 1.3 1
80 BC160NT405-80-D OEZ:33607 63 ÷ 80 400 ÷ 800 1.3 1
100 BC160NT405-100-D OEZ:33605 80 ÷ 100 500 ÷ 1 000 1.3 1
125 BC160NT405-125-D OEZ:33603 100 ÷ 125 625 ÷ 1 250 1.3 1
160 BC160NT405-160-D OEZ:33601 125 ÷ 160 800 ÷ 1 600 1.3 1
D6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS 4P

- connecting terminals for connecting cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2 1)
of the end sleeve (connecting terminals are included in the circuit breaker)
space, see page D21
1)
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BC-... connecting sets, see page D10, D11
Characteristic D - distribution 4P - for protected N conductor
16 BC160NT406-16-D OEZ:33644 12.5 ÷ 16 160 ÷ 240 1.3 1
20 BC160NT406-20-D OEZ:33643 16 ÷ 20 200 ÷ 300 1.3 1
25 BC160NT406-25-D OEZ:33642 20 ÷ 25 250 ÷ 375 1.3 1
32 BC160NT406-32-D OEZ:33641 25 ÷ 32 160 ÷ 320 1.3 1
40 BC160NT406-40-D OEZ:33640 32 ÷ 40 200 ÷ 400 1.3 1
50 BC160NT406-50-D OEZ:33638 40 ÷ 50 250 ÷ 500 1.3 1
BC160NT406-160-D
63 BC160NT406-63-D OEZ:33636 50 ÷ 63 315 ÷ 630 1.3 1
80 BC160NT406-80-D OEZ:33634 63 ÷ 80 400 ÷ 800 1.3 1
100 BC160NT406-100-D OEZ:33632 80 ÷ 100 500 ÷ 1 000 1.3 1
125 BC160NT406-125-D OEZ:33630 100 ÷ 125 625 ÷ 1 250 1.3 1
160 BC160NT406-160-D OEZ:33628 125 ÷ 160 800 ÷ 1 600 1.3 1
D7
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR 4P

of the end sleeve (connecting terminals are included in the switch-disconnector)
1)
Ie [A] Type Order code Weight [kg] Package [pc]

160 BC160NT405-160-V OEZ:33626 1.3 1
BC160NT405-160-V
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES 3P 4P
3-pole design, with interconnecting busbars

Type Order code Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]
RCD-BC3-EF06 OEZ:37745 In 63 A, IΔn 0.3 A, without tΔn setting 1.44 1
RCD-BC3-EA06 OEZ:37747 In 63 A, IΔn 0.03 ÷ 3 A, without tΔn setting 1.44 1
RCD-BC3-EA16 OEZ:37748 In 160 A, IΔn 0.03 ÷ 3 A without tΔn setting 1.65 1
- CS-BC-L006 or CS-BC-L016 is part of residual current module
RCD-BC3-EF16
4-pole design, with interconnecting busbars

- CS-BC-L406 or CS-BC-L416 is part of residual current module
RCD-BC4-EA16
4-pole design, without interconnecting busbars

RCD-BC0-EF16 OEZ:37761 In 160 A, IΔn 0,3 A, without tΔn setting 1.27 1
RCD-BC0-EA16 OEZ:37762 In 160 A, IΔn 0,03 ÷ 3 A, without tΔn setting 1.27 1
RCD-BC0-EF06 OEZ:38375 In 63 A, IΔn 0,3 A, without tΔn setting 1.27 1
RCD-BC0-EA06 OEZ:38376 In 63 A, IΔn 0,03 ÷ 3 A, without tΔn setting 1.27 1
RCD-BC0-EA16
D8
CONNECTING SETS FOR RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE 3P 4P
Type Order code Description Weight [kg] Package [set]

CS-BC-S006 OEZ:38379 Interconnecting busbars, In = 63 A, for 3P design 0.17 1
CS-BC-S016

CS-BC-S416
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR 3P 4P

5SV8000-6KK OEZ:42658 Analogue design, IΔn and tΔn setting 0.18 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page P4
5SV8000-6KK

5SV8001-6KK OEZ:42659 Digital design, IΔn and tΔn setting 0.26 1
5SV8200-6KK OEZ:42660 Digital design, IΔn and tΔn setting, 4 channels 0.26 1
5SV8001-6KK
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR 3P 4P

5SV8700-0KK OEZ:42661 Internal diameter 20 mm, including holder on “U“ rail according 0.09 1
to EN 60715 wide 35 mm
5SV8701-0KK - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page P4

5SV8702-0KK OEZ:42663 Internal diameter 35 mm, including holder on the panel 0.2 1
5SV8706-0KK

5SV8 900-1KK OEZ:42668 Holder on “U“ rail according to EN 60715 wide 35 mm for current 0.01 2
transformers with internal diameter up to and including 105 mm
5SV89000-1KK
D9
CONNECTING SETS 3P
3 terminals
Type Order code Description S [mm2] Method of connection Weight [kg] Package [set]1)
CS-BC-A011 OEZ:20223 Front connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.05 1
CS-BC-A011 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D18
CS-BC-B021 OEZ:20237 Double block 2x (25 ÷ 120) Cu/Al cables 0.18 1

terminal
- terminals cover included - degree of protection IP20
CS-BC-B021
CS-BC-A021 OEZ:20236 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.18 1

CS-BC-A021
CS-BC-PS01 OEZ:20239 Potential terminals 1.5 ÷ 2.5; 4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor 0.01 1

CS-BC-PS01
CS-BC-B014 OEZ:34957 Block terminals 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) Cu/Al cables 0.18 1

- for 5 cables
CS-BC-B014
CS-BC-A033 OEZ:20608 Reduction for BA…*33 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.11 1
REPLACEMENT OF FORMERLY PRODUCED
TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D18

- for total replacement of BA…*33 circuit breaker also is necessary the OD-BC-MS33 mounting set
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CS-BC-A033
CS-BC-AJ21 OEZ:43710 Reduction for J21U50 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 1.00 1
- front connection
- for total replacement of 21U50 circuit breaker - front connection mounting set OD-BC-MS21 is necessary
CS-BC-AJ21
1)
one set provides for connecting one side of the circuit breaker (set includes three terminals with necessary coupling elements)
D10
CONNECTING SETS 3P 4P
1 terminal
CS-BC-A411 OEZ:33653 Front connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.02 1
CS-BC-A411 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D18
CS-BC-A421 OEZ:33654 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.08 1

CS-BC-A421
CS-BC-B421 OEZ:33658 Double block 2x (25 ÷ 120) Cu/Al cables 0.25 1

terminal
CS-BC-B414 CS-BC-B414 OEZ:34958 Block terminal 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) Cu/Al cables 0.24 1
- for 5 cables
CS-BC-PS41 OEZ:36030 Potential terminals 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor 0.005 1

CS-BC-PS41
MOUNTING SETS 3P 4P
Type Order code Description Weight [kg] Package [set]2)

REPLACEMENT OF FORMERLY PRODUCED
OD-BC-MS33 20625 Reduction for BA…*33 0.13 1

- DIMENSIONS, see page D27
- for total replacement of BA…*33 circuit breaker 2 connecting sets CS-BC-A033 are necessary
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
OD-BC-MS33
OD-BC-MS21 OEZ:43711 Reduction for J21U50 - front connection 0.90 1

- for total replacement of J21U50 circuit breaker with front connection 2 connecting sets CS-BC-AJ21 are necessary
OD-BC-DIN1 OEZ:20238 For mounting on “U“ rail according 0.05 1
OD-BC-MS21
OD-BC-DIN1 2)
one set provides for replacing one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
D11
SWITCHES 3P 4P
Auxiliary - signal state of the main contacts

Type Order code Operating voltage Contacts Weight [kg] Package [pc]
PS-BC-0010 OEZ:20227 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.01 1
PS-BC-0010-Au OEZ:20228 AC/DC 5 ÷ 60 V 0.01 1
PS-BC-0010
Signal - signal tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release

Type Order code Description Contacts Weight [kg] Package [pc]
NS-BC-0010 OEZ:20225 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.01 1
NS-BC-0010-Au OEZ:20226 AC/DC 5 ÷ 60 V 0.01 1
NS-BC-0010
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Type Order code Operating voltage Weight [kg] Package [pc]

SV-BC-X024 OEZ:20233 AC/DC 24, 48 V 0.05 1
SV-BC-X110 OEZ:20234 AC 110, 230 V / DC 110, 220 V 0.05 1
SV-BC-X230 OEZ:20235 AC 230, 400 V / DC 220 V 0.05 1
SV-BC-X230
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES 3P 4P
Type Order code Operating voltage Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]
SP-BC-X024 OEZ:20229 AC/DC 24, 48 V 0.05 1
SP-BC-X110 OEZ:20231 AC 110, 230 V / DC 110, 220 V 0.05 1
SP-BC-X230 OEZ:20232 AC 230, 400 V / DC 220 V 0.05 1
SP-BC-X230
DELAY UNIT

BZ-BX-X230-A OEZ:36696 Enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers 0.12 1
Modeion
- the delay can be set up at three levels (according to wiring)
BZ-BX-X230-A
D12
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P
Type Order code Name - description Weight [kg] Package [pc]

RP-BC-CK10 OEZ:20560 Hand drive unit - without locking 0.08 1
RP-BC-CK20 OEZ:20593 Hand drive unit - with locking 0.08 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the circuit breaker - hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
for control on the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
RP-BC-CK20 - hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN..
- hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK21 OEZ:20594 Hand drive unit - yellow - with locking 0.08 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the circuit breaker - hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
for control on the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
- hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN..
- hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK21
RP-BC-CK30 OEZ:20595 Hand drive unit for right - without locking 0.14 1
side control
RP-BC-CK31 OEZ:20596 Hand drive unit left side - without locking 0.14 1
control
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: with the extension shaft RP-BC-CH.., with the hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN.., with the hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK30
RP-BC-CP10 OEZ:20561 Hand drive lever - black - without locking 0.02 1
RP-BC-CP20 OEZ:20562 Hand drive lever - black - with locking 0.02 1
RP-BC-CP20
RP-BC-CP21 OEZ:20597 Hand drive lever - red - with locking 0.02 1

RP-BC-CP21
RP-BC-CN10 OEZ:20564 Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP40 0.05 1

- is used in combination with the black lever of RP-BC-CP10 or RP-BC-CP20 hand drive
RP-BC-CN10

- yellow
- yellow
RP-BC-CN11 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D48
- is used in combination with the red lever of RP-BC-CP21 hand drive
RP-BC-CH10 OEZ:20563 Extension shaft - length 350 mm 0.12 1

RP-BC-CH10
RP-BC-CH20 OEZ:20600 Extension shaft - telescopic, length 199 ÷ 352 mm 0.92 1

RP-BC-CH20
D13
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING AND PARALLEL SWITCHING 3P 4P
Type Order code Name Weight [kg] Package [pc]

RP-BC-CB10 OEZ:20601 Mechanical interlocking 0.09 1
RP-BC-CB10 - Mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BC-CK.. (cannot be combined with hand drive unit for side control)
2 hand drive levers RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CD10 OEZ:20602 Mechanical parallel switching 0.11 1

- Mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BC-CK.. (cannot be combined with hand drive unit for side control)
1 hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CD10
MOTOR
OTOR DRIVES 3P 4P

MP-BC-X024-B OEZ:34450 Motor drive side, AC/DC 24 V 0.9 1
MP-BC-X230-B
OD-BC-KA02-A OEZ:34454 Extension cable, length 0.6 m, for motor drive 0.1 1
OD-BC-KA02-B OEZ:37510 Extension cable, length 3 m, for motor drive 0.2 1
OD-BC-KA02-A
ACCESSORIES 3P 4P
Type Order code Název - popis Weight [kg] Package [pc]

OD-BC-KS02 OEZ:20224 Insulating barriers - set (two pieces), for 3P and 4P design 0.03 1
OD-BC-KS42 OEZ:33660 Insulating barrier - one piece, for 4P design 0.02 1
- included with each circuit breaker or switch-disconnector order
- in case connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary to install these barriers also on the lower side, for more
detailed information see page D21
OD-BC-KS02
OD-BC-KS03 OEZ:20240 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 3P 0.05 1

OD-BC-KS43 OEZ:33661 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 4P 0.07 1
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs
OD-BC-KS03
OD-BC-UP01 OEZ:20241 Lever with locking 1

- enables to lock the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in „switched off manually“ position (loaded)
- locking is possible using padlock with shank diameter 3 ÷ 4 mm
OD-BC-UP01
D14
BC160N Technical information Modeion
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS 3P 4P
Specifications CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
Type BC160NT.. BC160NT...-V
Series NORMAL
Dimensions A x B x C + D (3P/4P design) 75/100 x 130 x 70 + 23 mm 75/100 x 130 x 70 + 23 mm
Weight (3P/4P design) 1/1.3 kg 1/1.3 kg
Standards EN 60947-2, IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 3, 4 3, 4
Rated current In 16 ÷ 160 A 2) -
Rated normal current Iu 16 ÷ 160 A 2) 160 A
Rated operating current Ie - 160 A
Rated operating voltage Ue max. AC 690 V max. AC 690 V
max. DC 250 V (3P) max. DC 250 V (3P)
Circuit breaker max. DC 440 V (4P) max. DC 440 V (4P)
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 8 kV 8 kV
Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V 690 V
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A -
Utilization category (switching mode) AC-3 (16 ÷ 100 A) AC-23 A
AC-2 (125 ÷ 160 A) DC-22A
DC-22A
Rated short-time withstand current Icw / t - 2 kA/ 1 s
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (rms) 1) Icu / Ue 6 kA / AC 690 V
12 kA / AC 500 V
25 kA / AC 415 V -
40 kA / 230 V
25 kA / DC 250 V τ = max. 15 ms (3P)
20 kA / DC 440 V τ =max. 15 ms (4P)
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms) Ics / Ue 3 kA / AC 690 V
6 kA / AC 500 V
13 kA / AC 415 V -
20 kA / AC 230 V
13 kA / DC 250 V τ = max. 10 ms (3P)
13 kA / DC 440 V τ = max. 10 ms (4P)
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm / Ue 52 kA / AC 415 V 2.8 kA / AC 415 V
Switch-disconnector
Application in IT network Ue AC 690 V -
Off time at Icu 7 ms -
Losses per 1 pole at In = 160 A 15 W 15 W
Mechanical endurance 20 000 cycles 20 000 cycles
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V) 6 000 cycles 6 000 cycles
Switching frequency 120 cycles/hr 120 cycles/hr
Control force (3P/4P design) 55/65 N 55/65 N
Degree of protection from front side of the device IP40 IP40
Degree of protection of terminals IP20 IP20
Operating conditions
Dimensions Reference ambient temperature 40 °C 40 °C
Ambient temperature range -25 °C ÷ +55 °C -25 °C ÷ +55 °C
Working environment dry and tropical climate dry and tropical climate
Climatic resistance EN 60068 EN 60068
Pollution degree 3 3
Max. sea level 2 000 m 2 000 m
Seismic resistance 3g (8 ÷ 50) Hz 3g (8 ÷ 50) Hz
Design modifications
Installation positions
Front/rear connection z/z z/z
Plug-in design – –
Withdrawable design – –
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/–/z/– z/–/z/–
Shunt trip/with signal switch z/z z/z
Undervoltage release/with early switch/with signal switch z/–/z z/–/z
Front hand drive/side drive right/left z/z/z z/z/z
Mechanical interlocking - with Bowden cable/for hand drive –/z –/z
Motor drive/with counter of cycles z/– z/–
Load Load
Lever with locking z z
Connection of 3P circuit breaker Connection of 4P circuit breaker z available, – unavailable

1)
in DC circuit up to DC 250 V in DC circuit up to DC 440 V in case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change
2)
ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics see page D37
- protection of Modeion switch-disconnectors, see page R10
D15
Modeion BC160N Technical information
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS 3P
Specifications
Description of push button function and signalling

TEST push button - by pressing you will switch off the circuit Pressing requires a suitable instrument, such as a wire with
breaker/switch-disconnector, including to actuate the auxiliary cross-section of about 1 mm.
switches Signalling of tripping by the overcurrent release - after
Inspection push button - by pressing you will simulate tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, it will
tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, in- display the indicator „ “
cluding to actuate the auxiliary switches and signal switch.
Diagram TEST push button

Circuit breaker with accessories (3-pole design)
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
INSPECTION push button Signalling of tripping by the overcurrent release
OFF - signalling is for circuit breakers with characteristic D,
B
M and N
Motorový pohon
Motor drive Pomocnéreleases
Auxiliary spouště nebo
or Spínače
Switches Hlavní obvod
Main circuit
pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary
D1
C1
6. 2
5. 2
4. 2
6. 4
5. 4
1 3 5
4.4
10.Y1
10.Y1
4 3 1
X3
TEST
SV -BC-...
SP-BC-...
Q
V
M P A
or
6.PS-BC-0010
5.PS-BC-0010
4.PS-BC-0010
MP
I>
N
10.Y2
10.Y2
REVIZE
INSPECTION
2 5 6 9 10
6. 1
5. 1
4. 1
D2
C2
X3 J 2 4 6
cavity
dutinaNo.10
č. 10 cavity
dutinaNo.6
č. 6 cavity
dutinaNo.5
č. 5 cavity
dutinaNo.4
č. 4
HL 1 HL 2 HL 3 HL 4
N- B
OvládacíControl
obvod motorového pohonu,
circuit of motor drive, signalizace
signalling
Spínače
Switches
návěstní
signalnebo pomocný
or auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary
1. 2
1. 4
1. 2
2. 2
3. 2
1. 4
2. 4
3. 4
Power losses (per 1 pole)

In [A] P [W]
16 4
20 4
25 4
32 4
A
40 4
50 5
1.NS-BC-0010
1.PS-BC-0010
2.PS-BC-0010
3.PS-BC-0010
63 6
or
80 7
100 10
125 15
1. 1
2. 1
3. 1
1. 1
cavity
dutinaNo.1
č. 1 cavity
dutinaNo.2
č. 2 cavity No.3
dutina č. 3 160 15
D16
Diagram
Diagram description
MP motor drive - MP-BC...
M motor
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive P gear unit
Q3
X3 connector for connection of control and signalling circuits
L+ B recommended wiring of the control circuits
- it is not a part of motor drive
ON switch on button
ON OFF switch off button
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page D50
OFF
J circuit breaker BC160
B Q main contacts
T thermomagnetic overcurrent release
Motorový pohon Sp Spínače
ín e
3P+N (3 poles are protected, N pole is unprotected)
Motor drive Switches
pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary 4P (all 4 poles are protected)
V trip-free mechanism
9. 2
8. 2
7. 2
9. 4
8. 4
7. 4
X3
4 3 1 TEST push button to test release
REVIZE inspection push button of release
SP-BC-X… undervoltage release
SV-BC-X… shunt trip
HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable switching on or switching off ),
max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever position „loaded“, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of the drive, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL4 signalling of exsertion of the drive locking bar, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
M P A
1)
voltage on terminals 5, 6, 9, 10 is the same as Un of the motor drive
9.PS-BC-0010
8.PS-BC-0010
7.PS-BC-0010
MP
2 5 6 9 10
9. 1
8. 1
7. 1
X3 J
cavityč.No.9
dutina 9 cavity
dutinaNo.8
č. 8 cavity
dutinaNo.7
č. 7
HL 1 HL 2 HL 3 HL 4
N- B
OvládacíControl
obvod circuit
motorového pohonu,
of motor drive, signalizace
signalling
Spínače
Switches nebo
or Pomocné
Auxiliary spouště
releases Hlavní obvod
Main circuit Spínače
Switches
po mo cn ý
auxiliary po mo cn ý
auxiliary po mo cn ý
auxiliary návěstní
signalnebo pomocný
or auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary pomocný
auxiliary
D1
1. 2
1. 4
C1
6. 2
5. 2
4. 2
1. 2
2. 2
3. 2
6. 4
5. 4
4. 4
1. 4
2. 4
3. 4
N 1 3 5
10.Y1
10.Y1
TEST
SP-BC-.. .
SV -BC-...
Q
V
A
or
1.NS-BC-0010
6.PS-BC-0010
5.PS-BC-0010
4.PS-BC-0010
1.PS-BC-0010
2.PS-BC-0010
3.PS-BC-0010
or
I>
T
10.Y2
10.Y2
REVIZE
INSPECTION
1. 1
6. 1
5. 1
4. 1
2. 1
3. 1
D2
1. 1
C2
J N 2 4 6
cavity
dutinaNo.6
č. 6 cavity
dutinaNo.5
č. 5 cavity
dutinaNo.4
č. 4 cavity
dutinaNo.10
č. 10 cavityč.No.1
dutina 1 cavity
dutinaNo.2
č. 2 cavity No.3
dutina č. 3
D17
Specifications
Connecting and installation
Power circuit
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables and possibly ca- we recommend painting the connecting busbars
bles with cable lugs input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
connection sets are produced to provide greater connect- einforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces
ing options, see page D10 to the circuit breaker during short-circuiting
generally, conductors from the supply are connected to in- the method of connecting the power circuit must observe
put terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to termi- the deionization space of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnec-
nals 2, 4, 6; however, it is possible to reverse the connection tor, see page D21
(exchanging input and output terminals without limiting
rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu) Auxiliary circuits
in case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/switch- switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected
disconnector must be fitted with ODBL-KS02 insulating using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
barriers also on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6, for more directly to terminals on these devices
detailed information see page D21
Recommended minimum cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for BC160
Cables S [mm2] Busbars W x H [mm] Ik ≤ 25 kA
IR (In) [A]
Cu Al Cu Al
16 2.5 - - -
20 2.5 - - -
25 4 - - -
32 6 - - -
40 10 - - -
50 10 16 - -
63 16 25 - -
80 25 35 - -
100 35 50 16 x 2; 12 x 3 16 x 4; 12 x 5
125 50 70 16 x 4; 12 x 5 16 x 5; 12 x 6
160 70 95 16 x 5; 12 x 6 16 x 6; 12 x 8
- it is necessary to follow the relevant valid standards when cables are designed
Connecting set specifications

Typ Imax [A] Cable - ranges of connection cross-sections S [mm2]
Type of cable sector stranded sector solid round stranded round solid
Busbars and cable Technical

lugs W x H information
CS-BC-B021 160 2x (251) ÷ 120) 2x (25 ÷ 120) 2x (251) ÷ 120) 2x (25 ÷ 120) page D25
1) 1)
CS-BC-B421 160 2x (25 ÷ 120) 2x (25 ÷ 120) 2x (25 ÷ 120) 2x (25 ÷ 120) page D31
CS-BC-A011 160 16 x … page D25
CS-BC-A411 160 page D31
CS-BC-A021 160 16 x … page D26
CS-BC-A421 160 page D32
CS-BC-PS01 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5 / 4 ÷ 6
CS-BC-PS41 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6
CS-BC-A033 160 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*33 with front connection 30 x … page D27
CS-BC-AJ21 160 Reduction for circuit breaker J21U50 with front connection 30 x … page D27
CS-BC-B014 160 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) page D26
CS-BC-B414 160 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) 5x (2.5 ÷ 25) page D32
1) 2 2
stranded conductor with cross-sections 25 mm ÷ 50 mm only with end sleeve
D18
Front connection - Cu/Al cables, busbars (connecting set is a part of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector)
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.5 ÷ 16 mm2 Al, Cu … 4 Nm 4

25 ÷÷95
2,5 mm22Al
16mm Al,…Cu
6 Nm 4
... 4 N m 4
25
25 ÷÷95 mm22Cu
95mm Al, …
Cu8 Nm
... 6 N m4 4
2.
12 (max. 13)
17
Front connection - Cu/Al busbars Rear connection - Cu/Al busbars
3. 6,4
2. 8
16
CS-BC-A011 3.
1.
CS-BC-A021
2.
1.
5.
6.
5.
7.
8 N m ... 5
4.
111
16 (max. 17)
8
4.
8 N m ... 5
D19

Front connection - 2x Cu/Al cables Front connection - cable lugs
CS-BC-B021 1. 3.
CS-BC-A011
5. 2.
or OD-BC-KS03
IP20 1.
6.
7. 5.
6 N m ... 4 6.
8. 2. 7.
1.
25 ÷ 70mm 2 Al,Cu ... 10 Nm 5

202
95 ÷ 120mm 2 Al,Cu ... 15 Nm 5

8 N m ... 5
8.
max 10
111
4.
max 17
4.
220
35
ø6
19
.5
3.
Front connection - reduction for circuit breaker BA...*33
CS-BC-A033
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.
6 N m ... 4 CS-BC-A033
183
37.5 37.5
ø1
0.5
30
16
D20
Deionization spaces
C=20 B=75 B=75 B=100 C=20 OD-BC-KS02
H
E=70 G=40 Un > 415 V AC
A2
A1
100
A
F=0 G=0 Un ≤ 415 V AC
130
D=20
H
A…minimum distance between the circuit breaker/ A2…minimum distance:
/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall - between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and
(applicable for connection using insulated conductors, uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated
cables, flexibars or with rear connection) conductors and busbars)
>15
A1…minimum insulation length of bare conductors - between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and
(using OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers busbar
from 50 mm to max. 100 mm, or by adding additional - between two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors
insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at situated vertically above one another
least A1 value) - between uninsulated connections of two circuit
breakers/switch-disconnectors above one another
Reference Dimension
A 50 mm C, D, E, F, G…minimum distance between the circuit
A1 100 mm breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed
A2 150 mm wall
H 30 mm H…minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
USE OF INSULATING BARRIERS AND TERMINAL COVERS WITH CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals N, 1, 3, 5 - it is always necessary to use OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers or OD-BC-KS03 and
OD-BC-KS43 terminal cover (when using CS-BC-B421 connections sets for connecting
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set)
- terminals N, 2, 4, 6 - it is always necessary to use OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers or a OD-BC-KS43 terminal
cover if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals N, 2, 4, 6 (when
using CS-BC-B421 connections sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch-disconnector, the terminal
cover is included in the connecting set)
- rear connection - insulating barriers and covers need not be used
D21

Specifications RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE
Type RCD-BC3-E… RCD-BC0-E…
RCD-BC4-E…
Dimensions A x B x C + D 100 x 130 x 70 +10 mm 100 x 130 x 70 +10 mm
Weight 1.7 kg 1.3 kg
Standards EN 60947-2 EN 60947-2
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Approval marks
Type A A
Number of poles 3; 4 3; 4
Rated current In 63; 160 A 63; 160 A
Rated residual current IΔn RCD-...-EF.. 0.3 - fixed/ 0.3 - fixed/
RCD-...-EA.. /0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0; 3.0 A /0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0; 3.0 A
Maximum inactivity time tΔn RCD-...-EF.. 0 - without delay/ 0 - without delay/
RCD-BC4-EA16 RCD-...-EA.. /0; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0 s /0; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0 s
Rated voltage Un AC 440 V AC 440 V
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 80 ÷ 253 V / 80 ÷ 440 V AC 80 ÷ 253 V / 80 ÷ 440 V
Rated impulse voltage Uimp 6 kV 6 kV
Losses per 1 pole 4W 4W
Mechanical/electrical endurance 8 000 cycles 8 000 cycles
Method of mounting side side
Installation on “U“ rail z z
Use circuit breaker BC160 circuit breaker BC160

Reference temperature 40 °C 40 °C
Ambient temperature range -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C
RCD-BC0-EA16 Max. sea level 2 000 m 2 000 m
Accessories
Connecting sets are part of delivery/have to be
z/– –/z
bought separately
Description
Designed to protect against leakage/residual current Design according to the parameters setting:
B
Accessories for BC160NT circuit breakers… - simple mounting Version with fixed residual current IΔn = 300 mA, without delay
on left side of the device Design with gradual setting of residual current IΔn and with
A C Can be mounted on “U“ rail by means of adapter setting of ultimate no action time of tΔn (see table)
C+D
Can be connected with the circuit breaker by interconnecting bus- When there is set I = 0.03 A the delay is always 0 s !
Δn
Dimensions bars (can be part of the device itself) or by standard cable Setting can be sealed
Design according to the way of connection: Module can be connected directly by means of CU/Al cable
Version without interconnecting busbars max. 95 mm2
(they are not a part of module) For other connection standard BC160 terminals with the exception
- interconnecting busbars can be bought separately, of rear connection can be used
see RCD connection LED to indicate device operation
- can be connected to the circuit breaker by a cable, LED signals 50 % IΔn
see RCD connection (cable is not part of the module)
Remote signalling of 50 % IΔn by means of make contact (only
Version with interconnecting busbars
at RCD-BC.-EA..)
- the interconnecting busbars for connection to the circuit
Remote signalling of circuit breaker switch off based on IΔn level
breaker are part of the (module circuit breaker terminals N, 2, 4, 6
by means of break contact in shunt trip
and module terminals N, 1, 3, 5 are connected)
Mechanism for disconnection of electronic parts of module from
The circuit breaker is switched off by special shunt trip, that is part
voltage - disconnection has to be done before the insulation
of the residual current module
resistance test is effected
Design according to nominal current:
TEST push button - complete test of the device by means of simulation
Version up to 63 A for BC160NT …circuit breakers up to 63 A
of real residual current
Version up to 160 A for BC160NT …circuit breakers from 80 up
Circuit breaker can not be assembled by another shunt trip or
to 160 A undervoltage release
Two circuit breakers with residual current module can be assembled
neither by mechanical interlocking nor by parallel switching
D22
Description Signal contact specifications

Disconnection of residual current
Signalling switch of switch off by a failure
TEST push button module from voltage Transparent sealable cover
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 230 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
LED to indicate device operation Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie/Ue 2 A / AC 230 V
Thermal current Ith 6A
LED signals 50 % Arrangement of contacts 01
of residual current
Signalling switch of meeting the value of 50 % IΔn
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 250 V / DC 30 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
5 A / DC 30 V
Interconnecting busbars Setting of nominal Setting of maximum Thermal current Ith 5A
residual current IΔn inactivity time tΔn
Arrangement of contacts 10
Wiring diagram
Design RCD-BC4-.... and RCD-BC0-....
Napěťová spoušť
Shunt trip Hlavní obvod
Main circuit Chráničový
Residual modul
current device
10.Y 1
C1
X1
Y1
N 1 3 5 N 1 3 5
TEST RCD
J circuit breaker BC160
RCD residual current device
Q main contacts
SV-BC-D024-RCD
TEST
T thermomagnetic overcurrent release
F2
E electronic of residual current device
S2
S1 TEST push button to test release
Q E
V MINITEST inspection push button of release
10 TEST RCD button of residual current module
S1 signalling of 50 % residual current value
S2 signalling switch of switch off by a failure
DT
F2 shunt trip
DT disconnection of residual current module from voltage
T
10.Y 2
J MINITEST RCD
X2
Y2
C2
N 2 4 6 N 2 4 6
Design RCD-BC3-...
Napěťová spoušť
Shunt trip Hlavní obvod
Main circuit Chráničový
Residual modul
current device
Y1
X1
10.Y 1
C1
1 3 5 1 3 5
TEST RCD
SV-BC-D024-RCD
F2 TEST
S1
Q E
V
10
DT
T
10.Y 2
J MINITEST RCD
X2
Y2
C2
2 4 6 2 4 6
Total max. switching off time

Maximum inactivity time - adjusted value
0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 500 ms 1 000 ms
1x IΔn < 70 ms < 230 ms < 350 ms < 440 ms < 630 ms < 1 200 ms
D23
Reduction of rated current of circuit breaker according to connection type

Rated current Connection between Reduction coefficient: Adjusted Real current Ir1 (t = 40 °C) 4)
Circuit breaker 1) Residual current device Inlet/outlet cables Figure
of circuit breaker In circuit breaker and RCD „k“ 3) current Ir Ir1 = In x k
RCD-BC0-EF16 CS-BC-S016 2) 160 A 144 A (160 x 0.90)
Cu, 70 mm2 5) 0.9 1
2)
RCD-BC0-EA16 CS-BC-S416 125 A 112.5 A (125 x 0.90)
RCD-BC3-EF16
BC160NT305-160-D CS-BC-L016 160 A 152 A (160 x 0.95)
RCD-BC3-EA16
Cu, 70 mm2 5) 0.95 2
RCD-BC4-EF16
BC160NT405-160-D CS-BC-L416 125 A 119 A (125 x 0.95)
RCD-BC4-EA16
BC160NT406-160-D RCD-BC0-EF16 CS-BC-S016 2) 160 A 160 A
160 A Cu, 95 mm2 5) 1 1
2)
BC160NT305-160-L RCD-BC0-EA16 CS-BC-S416 125 A 125 A
RCD-BC3-EF16
BC160NT405-160-L CS-BC-L016 160 A 160 A
RCD-BC3-EA16
Cu, 95 mm2 5) 1 2
RCD-BC4-EF16
BC160NT406-160-L CS-BC-L416 125 A 125 A
RCD-BC4-EA16
160 A 160 A
cable S = 95 mm2 6) Cu, 70 mm2 5) 1 3
125 A 125 A
1)
for others circuit breaker is reduction coefficient k = 1
2)
connecting sets can be mounted on both upper/lower terminals
3)
coefficients „k“ are not dependent on ambient temperature
4)
dependency of nominal current In on ambient temperature can be found in the catalogue, see page D37
5)
length of cables 2 m is given by standard EN 60947-1
6)
cables length 0.5 up to 1 m
- In case of the connection of the fine stranged conductor, we recommend using of the end sleeve
1 3
Cu,
Cu, SS == 95 mm2l, =l =0,5
95 mm, 0.5÷ ÷
1m1m
2
N 1 2 3 N 1 2 3
N 1 2 3 N 1 2 3
Cu, mm2l, =
Cu, S = 95 mm, l =0,5
0.5÷ ÷1 1mm
2
N 1 2 3
N 1 2 3
Cu,
Cu,S S==95 mm,2, l = 0,5
95mm 0.5 ÷÷ 11m
m2
D24
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection Drilling diagram
98
68,5
68.5
18 20 2
øø66
.,44 1,5
1.5
12
7
25
38
14°
2°
100
130
118
100
93
111
45
13°
RR5
63
544,
x4
.66
40.5
40,5
ø4
15
25 25 20 25 25
70
75
80
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BC-B021 connecting set)
68,5
68.5
30 19
25 25
25
202
186
154
100
220
136
111
168
75 2xø16,2
2xø16.2
D25
Dimensions
10 68,5
68.5
25 25 31 11,5 11.5
11.5 11,5
25
135
157
179
202
191
169
147
100
220
111
75
5xø7,3
5xø7.3
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BC-A021 connecting set) Drilling diagram
25 25 25 25
5.5
5,5
ø15
25 25
3
ø13,2
ø13.2
42
87
130
100
100
130
111
111
80
x4
ø6
ø2
35
12
.,4
9,5
9.5
75 70
2
D26
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BC-A033 connecting set) Fixed design, front connection (CS-BC-AJ21 connecting set)
- reduction for BA...*33 circuit breaker - replacement for J21U50 circuit breaker
125
37,5
37.5 37,5
37.5 50.5
50,5 50.5
50,5
25 25.5
25,5 25.5
25,5
1.9
1,9
1.5
1,5
3
20,1 5
20.1
22 4
25
25
222,5
222.5
133
245
242
130
111
183
100
130
111
75
75
56.3
56,3
10
20 20
1
36,5
36.5
ø1
ø1
10
0,.5
20 20
20
70
80
Fixed design, front hand drive

75
BC160...
RP-BC-CK..
RP-BC-CP..
22,5
22.5
22,5
22.5
63
°
90
98 29
45°
27,5
27.5
Fixed design, hand drive - front, with adjustable lever Switchboard door modification
75
RP-BC-CP..
BC160... min.50
RP-BC-CK.. RP-BC-CN..
45
RP-BC-CH..
ø3
7
22.5
22,5
32
ø6
45
22,5
22.5
32
63
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
°
90
98
45° 124 - 448 (CH10)
27,5
27.5
297 - 450 (CH20)
D27
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive - control on right side, with adjustable lever
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
SWITCHBOARD PANEL °
90
RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CK30
45°
45
RP-BC-CH..
63
BC160... RP-BC-CP..
26,6
26.6 114,5
114.5
45,5
45.5 -- 369,5
369.5 (CH10)
(CH10) 50
218,5
218.5 -- 371,5
371.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
Fixed design, hand drive - control on left side, with adjustable lever Switchboard modification
75
RP-BC-CN.. ø3
7
RP-BC-CP.. PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE

SWITCHBOARD PANEL
32
ø6
RP-BC-CK31 45
32
63
RP-BC-CH..
BC160...
°
90
45°
46,6
46.6 114,5
114.5
49,9
49.9 65,5 - 389.5
65.5 389,5 (CH10)
238,5 -- 391.5
238.5 391,5 (CH20)
(CH20)
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10 mechanical interlocking
148.2
148,2
12.5nebo
12,5 or 25
25
D28
Dimensions
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CD10 mechanical parallel switching
148,2
148.2
00+7
+7
or 12,5
12.5+7+7or
or25
25+7+7
Fixed design, installation on 35 mm “U“ rail
86
67
130
45
40.5
40,5
2,7
2.7
2
72
82
Fixed design, motor drive Drilling diagram

94,4
94.4
80 65
150 70 32,5
32.5
øø33
,.55
100
130
45
40,5
40.5
15
45,4
39,2
39.2 20
20 32,8
32.8
D29
Dimensions
Fixed design, residual current device, rear connection Drilling diagram

75 100
25 25 25 25 25 80
130
100
130
45
181.5
181,5
3
M
40,5
15
25 25 25
51,5
51.5
175 30
70
80
Fixed design, residual current device, bottom connection

75 100
25 25 25 25 25 80
130
130
45
173
40,5
40.5
43
175 5,8
5.8
42,7
42.7
70
80
D30
Dimensions
98
68,5
68.5
ø6 18 20 2
.,4
12 1,5
1.5
7
38
14°
2°
100
130
100
118
111
93
45
13°
R5 3
63
4.,6 M
40,5
40.5
15
25 25 25 20 50 25
70
100
80

25 25 25 68,5
68.5
30 19
25
202
186
100
220
111
154
136
168
100 2xø16,2
2xø16.2
D31
Dimensions

10 68,5
68.5
25 25 25 31 11,5 11.5
11.5 11,5
25
202
191
135
157
179
169
147
100
220
111
100
5xø7,3
5xø7.3
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BC-A421 connecting set) Drilling diagram
25 25 25 25 25 25
5,5
5.5
ø1
25 5 25
3
ø13,2
ø13.2
42
87
130
100
130
100
111
111
80
M
3
ø6
35
12
.,4
9.5
9,5
100 70
2
Fixed design, front hand drive

100
75
BC160...
RP-BC-CK..
RP-BC-CP..
22,5
22.5
22,5
22.5
63
°
90
98 29
45°
52,5
52.5
D32
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive - front, with adjustable lever
100
RP-BC-CP..
BC160...
RP-BC-CK.. RP-BC-CN..
45 RP-BC-CH..
22.5
22,5
45
22,5
22.5
63
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
98
45°
52,5
52.5 124 - 448 (CH10)
297 - 450 (CH20)
Switchboard door modification

min.50
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
D33
Dimensions
100
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CK30
45°
45
RP-BC-CH..
63
BC160... RP-BC-CP..
62.5
62,5 26.6
26,6 49.9
49,9 114,5
114.5
45.5 -- 369,5
45,5 369.5 (CH10)
(CH10)
218.5 -- 371,5
218,5 371.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
Fixed design, hand drive - control on left side, with adjustable lever
100
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK31 45
63
RP-BC-CH..
°
90
BC160... 45°
49.9
49,9 46.6
46,6 37.5
37,5 114,5
114.5
65.5 - 389,5
65,5 389.5 (CH10)
238.5 -- 391,5
238,5 391.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
Switchboard modification
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
D34
Dimensions
Fixed design, installation on 35 mm “U“ rail
86
67
130
45
40,5
40.5
2,7
2.7
2
72
82
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10 mechanical interlocking
148.2
148,2
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CD10 mechanical parallel switching
max.6 148,2
148.2
min.0
D35
Dimensions
Fixed design, motor drive Drilling diagram

94,4
94.4
80
175 70
130
100
45
3
M
40.5
40,5
15
25 25 25
45,4
45.4
39,2
39.2 20
20 32,8
32.8
Fixed design, Residual current device, rear connection Drilling diagram

100 100 80
25 25 25 25 25 25
100
130
45
130
181,5
3
181.5
M
40,5
40.5
15
25 25 25
51,5
51.5
30
200
70
80
Fixed design, Residual current device, bottom connection
100 100
25 25 25 25 25 25 80
130
130
45
173
40,5
40.5
43
200 5,8
5.8
42,7
42.7
70
80
D36
OVERCURRENT RELEASES 3P 4P
Overcurrent release is built into circuit breaker. BC160N circuit breakers with “L” characteristic have a Circuit breaker designation is set according to the re-
Release cannot be demounted and exchanged. given and fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers are quested rated current and protection characteristics.
4-pole circuit breakers are produced in variants: produced with In values in a standardized series of currents For example: Motors protection with In = 32 A.
3P+N (3 poles are protected, N pole is unprotected) 40 ÷ 160 A see table. Short-circuit release is fixed at the set- Type designation will be BC160NT305-32M.
4P (all 4 poles are protected) ting 4x In.
Permissible strength of N pole is 100 % In. BC160 circuit breakers with “D” characteristic have the Tripping characteristic setting:
option of setting to a reduced current in a range of approxi- dependent release (thermal) L (for circuit breakers with
Tripping characteristics mately 0.75÷1 In. The circuit breakers are produced with characteristics„D“ and„M“). Dependent release (reduced current
Circuit breakers are supplied with four types of tripping char- In values in a standardized series of currents 16÷160 A see value Ir) is being set in a continuous range using the Ir adjust-
acteristics. table. Short-circuit release is adjustable. Adjustment values ment dial on the overcurrent release. The Ir adjustment range is
They are designated with the letters: are given in the table. 0.75 ÷ 1 In.
„L“ - lines (3P) BC160N circuit breakers with “M” characteristic have the Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit trip) I
- protection lines with low starting currents option of setting to a reduced current in a range of approxi- (for circuit breakers with “D” and “N” characteristics). With
„D“ - distribution (3P, 3P+N, 4P) mately 0.75÷1 In. The circuit breakers are produced with In an independent instantaneous release (short-circuit current
- protection lines and transformers values in a standardized series of currents 16 ÷ 100 A see value Ii), adjustment is possible in a continuous range. All
„M“ - motor (3P) table. Short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 10x In. Circuit values are given in the table.
- motors protection breakers are not produced in 4-pole design. The value of short-circuit release in DC circuit
„N“ - only short-circuit release (3P) BC160N circuit breakers with “N” characteristic have only In case that the circuit breaker is used in a DC circuit, it is nec-
short-circuit release. They are produced with In values in a essary to set the value of the short-circuit release correctly.
standardized series of currents from 32 A to 160 A. Short- DC circuit the short-circuit release Ii (DC) = Ii × √2
circuit release is adjustable. Values are given in the table.
Rated currents in accordance with ambient temperature Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting at 40 °C
In [A] I- BC160NT305-…-L BC160NT305-…-D BC160NT305-…-M BC160NT305-…-N
+55 °C +40 °C +20 °C -15 °C In [A] In [A] Ii [A] IR [A] Ii [A] IR [A] Ii [A] IR [A] Ii [A]
16 15 16 17 19 16 - - 12.5 ÷ 16 160 ÷ 240 12.5 ÷ 16 160 - -
20 19 20 22 25 20 - - 16 ÷ 20 200 ÷ 300 16 ÷ 20 200 - -
25 23 25 28 31 25 - - 20 ÷ 25 250 ÷ 375 20 ÷ 25 250 - -
32 29 32 36 41 32 - - 25 ÷ 32 320 ÷ 480 25 ÷ 32 320 - 160 ÷ 320
40 38 40 45 53 40 40 160 32 ÷ 40 200 ÷ 400 32 ÷ 40 400 - 200 ÷ 400
50 48 50 56 66 50 50 200 40 ÷ 50 250 ÷ 500 40 ÷ 50 500 - 250 ÷ 500
63 57 63 69 83 63 63 252 50 ÷ 63 315 ÷ 630 50 ÷ 63 630 - 315 ÷ 630
80 73 80 88 100 80 80 320 63 ÷ 80 400 ÷ 800 63 ÷ 80 800 - 400 ÷ 800
100 92 100 108 122 100 100 400 80 ÷ 100 500 ÷ 1 000 80 ÷ 100 1 000 - 500 ÷ 1 000
125 112 125 133 145 125 125 500 100 ÷ 125 625 ÷ 1 250 - - - 625 ÷ 1 250
160 145 160 168 175 160 160 640 125 ÷ 160 800 ÷ 1 600 - - - 800 ÷ 1 600
Tripping characteristic class

Tripping times of the overcurrent release of circuit breakers BC160 with characteristic M
at 7.2 In corresponds to the release class 10 A, 10 and 20 according to EN 60947-4-1.
In Type Class
16 BC160NT305-16-M 10A
20 BC160NT305-20-M 10A
25 BC160NT305-25-M 10A
32 BC160NT305-32-M 10
40 BC160NT305-40-M 10
50 BC160NT305-50-M 20
63 BC160NT305-63-M 20
80 BC160NT305-80-M 20
100 BC160NT305-100-M 20
D37
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - D 3P 4P
Reduced current Short-circuit release Properties

In = 16 A suitable for protection of lines and distribution transformers
BC160NT305-16-D protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
In = 20 A reduced current setting IR = 0.75 ÷ 1 In
BC160NT305-20-D setting of short-circuit release:
- circuit breakers with In = 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A in the
In = 25 A range of 10 ÷ 15 In
BC160NT305-25-D
- circuit breakers with In = 40 A to 160 A in the range of 5 ÷ 10 In
In = 32 A setting of IR and Ii by means of knobs is smooth and linear
BC160NT305-32-D in the marked range
In = 40 A overcurrent release indicates circuit breaker switching off
BC160NT305-40-D by overcurrent or short circuit by an optical symbol
the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set
In = 50 A by the manufacturer to maximum
BC160NT305-50-D
In = 63 A
BC160NT305-63-D
In = 80 A
BC160NT305-80-D
In = 100 A
BC160NT305-100-D
In = 125 A
BC160NT305-125-D Data for the project
Circuit breaker BC160NT305-…
In = 160 A Overcurrent release D
BC160NT305-160-D
Overcurrent release setting
Reduced current IR …. A
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (…. x In)
t
IR
IMPORTANT
the set value of current of the short-circuit re-
lease must correspond to the impedance loop
- conditions must be fulfilled for automatic dis-
connection from power supply in case of failure
Ii
D38
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - M 3P
Reduced current Properties

In = 16 A appropriate for protection of motors
BC160NT305-16-M protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
reduced current setting IR = 0.75 ÷ 1 In
the value of the short-circuit release is fixed at 10 In
setting of IR by means of knob is smooth and linear in the
marked range
In = 20 A overcurrent release indicates circuit breaker switching off
BC160NT305-20-M by overcurrent or short circuit by an optical symbol
In = 25 A the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set
BC160NT305-25-M by the manufacturer to maximum
In = 32 A
BC160NT305-32-M
In = 40 A
BC160NT305-40-M
In = 50 A
BC160NT305-50-M
In = 63 A
BC160NT305-63-M
In = 80 A
BC160NT305-80-M
Data for the project
In = 100 A Overcurrent release M
BC160NT305-100-M
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (10x IR)
Short-circuit release
t
IR
IMPORTANT
reduced current IR must not be higher than
rated current of the motor
Ii
D39
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - L 3P
In = 40 A
BC160NT305-40-L
In = 50 A
BC160NT305-50-L
Properties
the release is suitable for protection of lines with low
In = 63 A
impulse currents
BC160NT305-63-L
protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
it is not possible to set a reduced current IR
the value of the short-circuit release Ii is fixed at 4 In
In = 80 A
BC160NT305-80-L
In = 100 A
BC160NT305-100-L
In = 125 A
BC160NT305-125-L

In = 160 A Overcurrent release L
BC160NT305-160-L
Overcurrent release values
Rated current In …. A
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (4x In)
Rated current Short-circuit release
t
In
IMPORTANT
high impulse current must not be in the circuit
- undesirable breaking would take place,
because the current of the short-circuit
release is fixed at 4 In
Ii
D40
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - N 3P
Short-circuit release Properties

In = 32 A for protection of e.g. motors with own overload protection
BC160NT305-32-N it does not protect in the overload range – it does not react
to low over-currents
In = 40 A the set values of the short-circuit release within 5 ÷ 10 In
BC160NT305-40-N setting of Ii by means of knobs is smooth and linear in the
marked range
the overcurrent release indicates circuit breaker switching
In = 50 A off by short circuit by an optical symbol
BC160NT305-50-N
by the manufacturer to maximum
In = 63 A
BC160NT305-63-N
In = 80 A
BC160NT305-80-N
In = 100 A
BC160NT305-100-N
In = 125 A
BC160NT305-125-N
In = 160 A Overcurrent release N
BC160NT305-160-N
t
IMPORTANT
the set value of current of the short-circuit
release must correspond to the impedance loop
- conditions must be fulfilled for automatic dis-
connection from power supply in case of failure
Ii
D41
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - D 4P

In = 16 A it is appropriate for protection of lines and distribution
BC160NT406-16-D transformers with protected „N“ conductor in TN-C-S and
TN-S networks
In = 20 A protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
BC160NT406-20-D
In = 25 A setting of short-circuit release:
BC160NT406-25-D
- circuit breakers with In = 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A in the
In = 32 A range of 10 ÷ 15 In
BC160NT406-32-D - circuit breakers with In = 40 A to 160 A in the range of 5 ÷ 10 In
the value of reduced current IR and of short-circuit release Ii
In = 40 A for the fourth pole is the same as for the other three poles
BC160NT406-40-D
setting of IR and Ii by means of knobs is smooth and linear
In = 50 A in the marked range
BC160NT406-50-D the overcurrent release indicates circuit breaker switching
In = 63 A off by short circuit by an optical symbol
BC160NT406-63-D the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set
by the manufacturer to maximum
In = 80 A
BC160NT406-80-D
In = 100 A
BC160NT406-100-D
In = 125 A
BC160NT406-125-D Data for the project
In = 160 A Overcurrent release D
BC160NT406-160-D
t
IR
IMPORTANT
- conditions must be fulfilled for automatic
disconnection from power supply in case
of failure
Ii
D42
SWITCHES 3P 4P
Specifications
Type PS-BC-0010, NS-BC-0010 PS-BC-0010-Au, NS-BC-0010-Au
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 60 ÷ 250 V AC 5 ÷ 60 V
DC 60 ÷ 250 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
PS-BC-0010
Rated operating current Ie / Ue AC-12 6 A/250 V 0.004 ÷ 0.1 A/5 ÷ 60 V
AC-15 5 A/60 V, 3 A/110 V, 1.5 A/230 V 0.004 ÷ 0.1 A/5 ÷ 60 V
DC-12 0.25 A/250 V 0.1 A/60 V
DC-13 0.5 A/60 V, 0.2 A/110 V, 0.1 A/250 V 0.004 ÷ 0.1 A/5 ÷ 60 V
Thermal current Ith 6A 0.5 A
Arrangement of contacts 001 001
Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch) IP20 IP20
NS-BC-0010
- switch can be used only in cavity No. 1
Function, name and location of switches according to type designation

10 Type Switch name Position of switch Switch function
6 5 4 1 2 3 PS-BC-0010 Signals state of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector’s main
Auxiliary Cavity 12), 2, 3, 4, 5, 61)
PS-BC-0010-Au contacts
NS-BC-0010
Signal Cavity 12) Signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
NS-BC-0010-Au
1)
when one of cavities 4, 5 or 6 is in use for auxiliary switches, cannot be used a shunt trip or undervoltage release
2)
Position of cavities in BC160N.... circuit breaker/ in cavity 1, PS-BC-0010 auxiliary switch and NS-BC-0010 signal switch cannot be used simultaneously
/switch-disconnector. When one of cavities 4, 5
or 6 is in use, cannot be used with a shunt trip or
undervoltage release.
States of switches in circuit breaker/switch-disconnector

10 Cavity 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (7, 8, 9)* 1 10
9 8 7 6 5 4 1 2 3
PS-BC-0010
NS-BC-0010
SV-BC-X...
SP-BC-X...
Circuit breaker lever position
State of the main contacts
State
of circuit breaker
Position of cavities in BC160NT4.. circuit breaker/

/switch-disconnector. When one of cavities 4, 5 or 6
is in use, cannot be used a shunt trip or undervoltage
release.
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1
Switched off manually (loaded state) 0 0 1 0 1 1

Switched off by the overcurrent release or
INSPECTION push button 0 0 1 1 0 1
Switched off by auxiliary release 0 0 1 0 1 0
Switched off by TEST push button 0 0 1 0 1 1

note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed
* only 4P design
D43
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Specifications
Type SV-BC-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC 2 VA
DC 2W
Characteristic U ≥ 0.7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switching off 15 ms
Loading time ∞
SV-BC-X230 Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected release) IP20
Position in cavity No. 10
Ambient temperature range -25 °C ÷ +55 °C
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals tripping by shunt trip
Type designation according to rated

10 operating voltage
6 5 4 1 2 3 Ue Type
AC/DC 24, 48 V SV-BC-X024
AC 110, 230 V / DC 110, 220 V SV-BC-X110
AC 230, 400 V / DC 220 V SV-BC-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the re- Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
Position of cavities in BC160NT.... circuit breaker/
lease is set up by jumpers directly on the release.
/switch-disconnector. When shunt trip is used, cavities
The setting from the manufacturer is always to
4, 5, 6 cannot be used for auxiliary switches.
the value corresponding to the type designation.
(see fig. 1) States and positions of circuit
breaker/switch-disconnector lever
10 Reaction time of the shunt trip States of circuit Lever position of circuit
breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector
9 8 7 6 5 4 1 2 3
1 Switched on
SV
0
>50 Switched off by releases or by TEST
1
push button
OK Switched off manually or by motor
0
Position of cavities in BC160NT4.. circuit breaker/ t (ms)
drive electrically (loaded state)
/switch-disconnector. When one of cavities 4, 5 or 6
release.
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip Description of graphs
L+ It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the cir- Symbol Description
cuit breaker is done by motor drive and shunt trip at once. The HK Main contacts
following time delays have to be kept between the disconnec-
OK Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
tion of voltage from the shunt trip and the control impulse for
10.Y 1
C1
switch on of the motor drive: IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
SV Control voltage on the shunt trip
1
SV -BC-...
HK
0
t1
10.Y 2
1
SV
C2
0
>50
t2 t1 = 70 ms (mode 1, 2), 140 ms (mode 3)
1
N- IMP ON t2 = 60 ÷ 500 ms (mode 1, 3), 60 ÷ ∞ (mode 2)
0
t (ms)
D44
Specifications
Type SP-BC-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC 2 VA
DC 2W
Characteristic 1) U ≤ 0.35 Ue the circuit breaker must trip
U ≥ 0.85 Ue it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
SP-BC-X230 Loading time ∞
Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals tripping by undervoltage release
1)
tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, for more detailed information see page P2
10
6 5 4 1 2 3 operating voltage
Ue Type
AC/DC 24, 48 V SP-BC-X024
AC 110, 230 V / DC 110, 220 V SP-BC-X110
AC 230, 400 V / DC 220 V SP-BC-X230
Position of cavities in BC160NT.... circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector. When undervoltage release The specific rated operating voltage of the re- Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
is used, cavities 4, 5, 6 cannot be used for auxiliary lease is set up by jumpers directly on the release.
switches. The setting from the manufacturer is always to
the value corresponding to the type designation States and positions of circuit
(see fig. 1).
breaker/switch-disconnector lever
10
Reaction time of the undervoltage release States of circuit Lever position of circuit
9 8 7 6 5 4 1 2 3 breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector
1 Switched on
SP
0
>50 Switched off by releases or by TEST
1
push button
OK
OK
Switched off manually or by motor
0
Position of cavities in BC160NT4.. circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector. When one of cavities 4, 5 or 6 t (ms) drive electrically (loaded state)
release. Cooperation of motor drive and undervoltage release Description of graphs
L+ It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the cir- Symbol Description
cuit breaker is done by motor drive and undervoltage release HK Main contacts
at once. The following time delays have to be kept between
bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the con-
D1
10.Y 1
trol impulse for switch on of the motor drive: IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
SP-BC-...
HK 1
0
t1
10.Y 2
1
D2
SP
0
>50
1
t2 t1 = 70 ms (mode 1, 2), 140 ms (mode 3)
N-
0
IMP ON t2 = 60 ÷ 500 ms (mode 1, 3), 60 ÷ ∞ (mode 2)
t (ms)
D45
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
The hand drive permits control the circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch
machines on and off. Modular conception of the drives
enables simple mounting on the circuit breaker (also ad-
ditionally) after the cover of cavities is removed. The fixed
drive can be sealed. The drive and its accessories are ordered
separately according to your choice, see page D13.
RP-BC-CK20 + RP-BC-CP10
The hand drive makes possible to control the circuit breaker:
a) from the front panel (fig. 1)
Hand drive unit RP-BC-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
b) through the switchboard door (fig. 2)
Hand drive unit RP-BC-CK.. Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS, see page D27, D32
+ Extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BC-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BC-CP..
c) through the side wall of the switchboard (fig. 3)
- in left- or right-side designs
Hand drive unit for side control
right RP-BC-CK30
or left RP-BC-CK31
+ Extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BC-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK21 + RP-BC-CH10 + RP-BC-CN11 + RP-BC-CP10 The hand drive unit is fixed directly to circuit breaker or
switch-disconnector.
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door and Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS, see page D27, D33
it provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
Hand drive lever is fixed on the hand drive unit or on the
hand drive bearing. Each hand drive bearing prevents the switchboard door
The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard from opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or in
(length 361 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjust- a state of being switched off by releases. By means of the
able length 215 ÷ 363 mm). device, it is possible to turn off this locking and to open the
door. Locking of the switchboard door opening also is possi-
Enhanced safety for operator: ble in the circuit breaker’s switched off manually state. It is
The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied necessary to activate the locking by means of the lever on the
with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in position bearing and to lock the hand drive.
„switched off manually“. The unit and lever of the hand drive Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be fitted also
RP-BC-CK30 + RP-BC-CH10 + RP-BC-CN11 + RP-BC-CP10 can be locked using three padlocks with shank diameter max. with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical paral-
Fig. 3 - DIMENSIONS, see page D28, D34 4 mm. lel switching, see page D49.
Specifications
Locking of the switchboard door opening in the circuit breaker state
Type Description Colour Locking while the circuit Degree of switched on „switched off manually” and locked Switchboard door opening with Length [mm]
breaker is in OFF state protection the circuit breaker switched on
RP-BC-CK10 Hand drive unit blue blue no - - - - -
RP-BC-CK20 Hand drive unit blue blue yes - - - - -
RP-BC-CK21 Hand drive unit blue yellow yes - - - - -
RP-BC-CK30 Hand drive unit - right side blue no - - - - -
RP-BC-CK31 Hand drive unit - left side blue no - - - - -
RP-BC-CP10 Hand drive lever black no - - - - -
RP-BC-CP20 Hand drive lever black yes - - - - -
RP-BC-CP21 Hand drive lever red yes - - - - -
RP-BC-CN10 Hand drive bearing black - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BC-CN11 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BC-CN20 Hand drive bearing black - IP66 yes yes yes -
RP-BC-CN21 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP66 yes yes yes -
RP-BC-CH10 Extension shaft - - - - - - 350 (can be
shortened)
RP-BC-CH20 Extension shaft - - - - - - 199 ÷ 352
telescopic design
D46
RP-BC-CB10 Mechanical interlocking
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/
/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit
L
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking
RP-BC-CB10
can be used between two BC160N circuit breakers. Both cir-
cuit breakers must be equipped with a hand drive (at least
X
one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever) see page
D48. In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary
to comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure
and given in the table. For correct function and signalling
the state of the BC160 circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10 me-
chanical interlocking, circuit breaker must be switched off, or
switch-disconnector must be in loaded position.
Dimension [mm]
X 87.5 or 100
L 94.5 or 106
RP-BC-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Enables for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/
/switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used be-
L
tween two BC160N circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers
must be equipped with hand drive unit and hand drive lever,
RP-BC-CD10 see page D48.
In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely necessary
to comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure X
and given in the table. Cannot be used in combination with

extension shaft (RP-BC-CH10 or RP-BC-CH20).
Dimension [mm]
X 75+7 or 87.5+7 or 100+7
D47
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
Motor drive is an accessory of the circuit breaker/switch- The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the
disconnector, by means of which it is possible to switch control lever driver. After returning the safety cover to the
the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector on and off re- original position, the drive is switched into the remote con-
motely. Modular conception of the drives enables simple trol mode automatically.
mounting on the circuit breaker also additionally. The After lifting the safety cover off it is possible to handle an
drive is used for both remote and local control of 3-pole automatic mode presetting change-over switch. Under
and 4-pole circuit breakers BC160. It is manufactured in the transparent cover there is also a red LED which lighting
the design for side mounting next to the circuit breaker indicates a failure (unfinished switching on/off/loading
on the switchboard panel or on “U” rail. The mounting operations).
of motor drive to the circuit breaker is done by bayonet Electronics circuits of the motor drive block erroneous con-
MP-BC-X230-B mechanism placed on the side of the circuit breaker. The trol processes, e.g. drive cycling after overcurrent or auxilia-
mounted motor drive can be locked by means of terminal ry release tripping.
cover seal. Side drive can be locked in off position of the circuit break-
Modeion BC160 circuit breakers with the motor drive are er by up to three padlocks with shaft diameter with shank
intended for industrial, power engineering and infrastruc- diameter max. 4 mm. It is possible to signal the locking re-
ture applications. The motor drives have a system of direct motely. The protective cover of the drives can also be sealed.
control of the circuit breaker, without a spring storage unit. The position of the main contacts of the circuit breaker is
The motor drive can work in the local or remote control indicated by the position of the circuit breaker driver lever
mode. The local control mode is used, for instance in loss under the transparent protective cover of the drive. The
of control voltage. Local control of the circuit breaker is wound up position of the circuit breaker can also be sig-
accessible only after lifting the transparent safety cover of nalled remotely.
OD-BC-KA02-A the drive off. This action locks the remote electrical control In the remote control mode the circuit breaker is switched on
circuits automatically. The lifted off position of the cover and off by ON and OFF push buttons respectively. The motor
can be indicated remotely. drive accessories include an extension cable OD-BC-KA02.
Motor drive automatic mode presettings

Switch Automatic mode Circuit breaker switching Circuit breaker loading Circuit breaker switching
Preset description
position presetting off to position **) to position on to position
Automatic Motor drive performs By pressing of ON push

1 *) - By overcurrent release
loading is on automatically button
- By inspection push button

Automatic The operator must press By pressing of ON push
2
loading is off the OFF push button button
- By auxiliary release
Symbol Description Simultaneous
- By TEST push button By pressing of ON push button the motor drive will
3 loading and
loading and switch on the circuit breaker ***)
Switched on manually or by motor drive electrically switching on
Switched off by overcurrent releases, shunt trip or
undervoltage release, TEST or INSPECTION push button The motor drive is out of operation, the red LED is lighting
Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically,
loaded state *)
Standard factory setting of the switch.
**)
When the circuit breaker is switched off by the motor drive electrically with the use of the OFF push button, the circuit breaker control lever
gets into the wound up position automatically, independently of the automatic mode presetting.
***)
By pressing the OFF push button, the motor drive only winds the circuit breaker up to the position.
Side drive description

Locking rail
Open safety cover Circuit breaker

control lever driver
Automatic mode presetting LED to indicate a failure (unfinished

change-over switch switching on/off/loading operations)
D48
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Diagram
Ovládací obvod motorového
Control circuit ofpohonu
motor drive
Diagram description
Q3
L+ MP motor drive - MP-BC...
M motor
P gear unit
ON
X3 connector for connection of control and signalling circuits
OFF B recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of MP-BC..
ON switch on button
B
OFF switch off button
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker
Motorový pohon
Motor drive
HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable switching on or switching off ),
max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever position „loaded“, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
4 3 1 HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of the drive, max. permissible load
X3
10 W 1)
HL4 signalling of exsertion of the drive locking bar, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
1)
voltage on terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10 is the same as Un of the motor drive
M P
MP
2 5 6 7
9 8
10
X3
HL 1 HL 2 HL 3 HL 4
N- B
OvládacíControl
obvod circuit
motorového pohonu,
of motor drive, signalizace
signalling For complete wiring diagram of the circuit breaker BC160 with motor drive see page D16
Specifications
Type MP-BC-X…-B
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Control impulse length for switching on 60 ms ÷ ∞ *)
for switching off 60 ms ÷ ∞ *)
Time to switching on < 70 ms *)
Time to switching off < 50 ms *)
Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 5 cycles/min
Frequency of cycles - instant successive ON/OFF 10 cycles
Mechanical endurance 20 000 cycles
Input power AC 100 VA
DC 100 W
Starting current 12 A / AC/DC 24 V
6 A / AC/DC 48 V
4 A / AC/DC 110 V
2 A / AC 230 V / DC 220 V
Protection AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V LTN-4C-1-4C-1; LTN-2C-1-2C-1
DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V LTN-UC-4C-1-4C-1; LTN-UC-2C-1-2C-1
Type OD-BC-KA02-A
Number of conductors 8
Conductor cross-section S 0.35 mm2
Conductor lengths 0.6 m
*) The values depends on the motor drive automatic mode presetting, see pages D50, D52, D53, D54
D49
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by motor drive Circuit breaker switching on electrically by motor
electrically with OFF push button drive with ON push button
Automatic operation No. 1, 2, 3 Automatic operation No. 1, 2, 3

Main contacts Main contacts
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - make contact Auxiliary switch - make contact
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - break contact Auxiliary switch - break contact
55 65
1 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Recommended control impulses

Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive electrically using the ON and OFF push buttons
Automatic operation No. 1 Automatic operation No. 2
>520 >520 >520 >520

>20 >20 >20 >20
60 ÷ 500 60 ÷ 500 60 ÷ ∞ 60 ÷ ∞
1 1
IMP OFF IMP ON IMP OFF IMP ON
0 0
50 <70 50 <70
HK 1 1
0 0
NS 1 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Automatic operation No. 3 Description of graphs

>520 >520
>20 >20
Symbol Description
60 ÷ 500 60 ÷ 500
1
IMP OFF IMP ON HK Main contacts
0
50 <70 NS Signal switch

HK 1 IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
0
IMP OFF Break impulse for the motor drive
NS 1 Switched on
0 Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically
t [ms]
(loaded state)
D50
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent release

or inspection push button
Automatic operation No. 1 Automatic operation No. 2 Automatic operation No. 3
Main contacts Main contacts Main contacts
10 10 10
1 1 1
0 0 0
Auxiliary switch - make contact Auxiliary switch - make contact Auxiliary switch - make contact
10 10 10
1 1 1
0 0 0
Auxiliary switch - break contact Auxiliary switch - break contact Auxiliary switch - break contact
15 15 15
1 1 1
0 0 0
Signal switch - make contact Signal switch - make contact Signal switch - make contact
10 1080 10 10
1 1 1
0 0 0
Signal switch - break contact Signal switch - break contact Signal switch - break contact
5 1085 5 5
1 1 1
0 0 0
t [ms] t [ms] t [ms]

Circuit breaker switching on with motor drive after its tripping by overcurrent release or inspection push button

>500
>1 500 *)
>20
60 ÷ 500 60 ÷ ∞ 60 ÷ ∞
1 1
IMP ON IMP OFF IMP ON
0 0
70 *) 70
HK 1 1
0 0
1 070 70
NS 1 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Symbol Description
60 ÷ 500
1
IMP ON HK Main contacts
0
*) 140 NS Signal switch
HK 1
IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
0
70 IMP OFF Break impulse for the motor drive
NS 1
Switched on
0
t [ms] Switched off by releases, TEsT or INSPECTION push button
Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically
(loaded state)
*) If the circuit breaker was switched off by an overcurrent release, it is necessary to remove the cause of the error before its switching on.
D51
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by shunt trip,

undervoltage release or TEST push button
Automatic operation No. 1 Automatic operation No. 2 Automatic operation No. 3
Main contacts Main contacts Main contacts
15 15 15
1 1 1
0 0 0
Auxiliary switch - make contact Auxiliary switch - make contact Auxiliary switch - make contact
15 15 15
1 1 1
0 0 0
Auxiliary switch - break contact Auxiliary switch - break contact Auxiliary switch - break contact
20 20 20
1 1 1
0 0 0
Signal switch of auxiliary releases Signal switch of auxiliary releases Signal switch of auxiliary releases
10 1085 10 10
1 1 1
0 0 0
t [ms] t [ms] t [ms]

Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive after tripping by shunt trip or undervoltage release

>500
>1 500
>20
60 ÷ 500 60 ÷ ∞ 60 ÷ ∞
1 1
IMP ON IMP OF F IMP ON
0 0
>200 *) >200 *)
1 1
SV SV
0 0
>200 *) >200 *)
1 1
SP SP
0 0
15 70
70
15 1 070 70
HK 1 HK 1
0 0
NS 1 NS 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
>500
Symbol Description
60 ÷ 500
1
IMP ON HK Main contacts
0
>200 *) NS Signal switch

SV 1
SV Impulse for shunt trip
0
>200 *) 140 SP Impulse for undervoltage release

1
SP IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
0
IMP OFF Break impulse for the motor drive
15 70
HK 1 Switched on
0
Switched off by releases, TEST or INSPECTION push button
NS 1 (loaded state)
0
t [ms]
*) Restart is only possible after deactivation of shunt trip or undervoltage release.
D52
Modeion
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BD250N, BD250S
E
Modeion BD250N, BD250S
Switching units, plug-in device, withdrawable device ........................................................................................E4
Overcurrent releases, switch-disconnector unit ......................................................................................................E6
Residual current monitor ......................................................................................................................................................E7
Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................E7
Connecting sets...........................................................................................................................................................................E7
Mounting sets ...........................................................................................................................................................................E10
Switches ........................................................................................................................................................................................E11
Shunt trips ...................................................................................................................................................................................E11
Undervoltage releases..........................................................................................................................................................E11
Delay unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................E11
Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................E12
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching....................................................................................................E13
Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................E13
Control relay ...............................................................................................................................................................................E13
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................................E14
- specifications.......................................................................................................................................E15
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................E16
- connecting, mounting .........................................................................................................................E18
- deionization spaces .............................................................................................................................E22
- dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................E24
Plug-in device - description, specifications, diagram ....................................................................................................E50
Withdrawable device
- description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................E52
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications .................................................................................................................E54
MTV8 - motor
L001 - lines
MTV9 - motor with adjustable timing selectivity
4D01 - distribution with N-pole protection
Connecting sets - specifications.......................................................................................................................................E19
Switches - specifications, diagram........................................................................................................................E61
Shunt trips - specifications, diagram........................................................................................................................E62
- specifications, diagram........................................................................................................................E64
Hand drives - description, specifications....................................................................................................................E66

- description, specifications, dimensions................................................................................................E67
Motor drives - description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................E69
E2
BD250N, BD250S Commercial information Modeion
PROPERTIES OF BD250 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Easy connection
or via cable lugs.
Connection of Cu/Al cable of cross section 10 to 240 mm2.
circuit breakers.

Local control
as the main switch.
Plug-in and withdrawable design

The possibility of a quick and easy replacement of the circuit breaker.
In the case of the withdrawable design, a secure visible disconnection of the main circuit.
The inspection position of the withdrawable design is intended for the inspection
of the auxiliary circuits (revisions).
E3
Modeion BD250N, BD250S Commercial information
SWITCHING UNITS 3P
Type Order code Iu [A] Icu [kA] Weight [kg] Package [pc]
BD250NE305 OEZ:14414 250 36 2.84 1
BD250SE305 OEZ:14415 250 65 2.84 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E15
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page E18 as well as deionization space, see page E23
Switching unit: includes - 2 CS-BD-A011 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)
- insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS01 (4x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BD-DV01
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BD-… (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BD-0250-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BD250NE305
1)
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E8
PLUG-IN DEVICE 3P

ZO-BD-0250-300 OEZ:14558 Plug-in device 1.593 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page page E50
Plug-in device: includes - complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in plug-in design
- mounting bolts set (4x M4x40) - for affixing switching unit to plug-in device
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..305
ZO-BD-0250-300
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BD-A011 can be used, that are included in the package
of the BD250..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E8
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE 3P

ZV-BD-0250-300 OEZ:14557 Withdrawable device 2.692 1
- Withdrawable device: includes - complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in withdrawable design
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..305
ZV-BD-0250-300
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BD-A011 can be used, that are included
with the BD250..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD ... connecting sets, see page E8
E4
SWITCHING UNITS 4P
BD250NE405 OEZ:19571 250 36 3P + N -conductor switching 3.7 1
BD250SE405 OEZ:19573 250 65 3P + N -conductor switching 3.7 1
BD250NE406 OEZ:19572 250 36 4P -conductor protection 3.9 1
BD250SE406 OEZ:19574 250 65 4P -conductor protection 3.9 1
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page E18 as well as deionization space, see page E23
Switching unit: includes - 2 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)
- insulating barriers
- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS01 (4x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BD-DV01
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BD-… (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BD-0250-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BD250NE405
1)
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E8
PLUG-IN DEVICE 4P

ZO-BD-0250-400 OEZ:20651 Plug-in device 2.1 1
Plug-in device: includes - complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in plug-in design
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..405 or BD250..406
ZO-BD-0250-400
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used, that are included in the package
of the BD250..40.. switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E8

ZV-BD-0250-400 OEZ:20652 Withdrawable device 3.2 1
Withdrawable device: includes - complete accessories for assembling breaker/switch-disconnector

must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..405 or BD250..406
ZV-BD-0250-400 - for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used, that are included with the
BD250..40.. switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E8
E5
DTV3 - characteristic D - distribution
In [A] Type Order code Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]
100 SE-BD-0100-DTV3 OEZ:24300 IR setting = 40 ÷ 100 A 0.317 1
SE-BD-0250-DTV3
MTV8 - characteristic M - motor

direct protection for motors and generators
suitable also for protection lines and transformers
100 SE-BD-0100-MTV8 OEZ:24310 IR setting = 40 ÷ 100 A 0.317 1
SE-BD-0250-MTV8
L001 - characteristic L - lines

without IR setting
In [A] Type Order code Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]1)
160 SE-BD-0160-L001 OEZ:20612 Without IR setting 0.317 1
SE-BD-0250-L001
MTV9 - characteristic M - motor with adjustable timing selectivity

suitable also for protection lines and transformers
enables setting delay of independent release to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
SE-BD-0250-MTV9 250 SE-BD-0250-MTV9 OEZ:19570 IR setting = 100 ÷ 250 A 0.317 1
OVERCURRENT RELEASES 4P
4D01 - characteristic D - distribution with N-pole protection
protection lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
100 SE-BD-0100-4D01 OEZ:33423 IR setting = 40 ÷ 100 A 0.327 1
SE-BD-0250-4D01 - intended for BD250..406 switching unit
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR UNIT 3P 4P
Ie [A] Type Order code Name Weight [kg] Package [pc]

250 SE-BD-0250-V001 OEZ:24120 Switch-disconnector unit 0.267 1
SE-BD-0250-V001
E6

5SV8000-6KK

5SV8001-6KK

to EN OEZ:60715 wide 35 mm
to EN OEZ:60715 wide 35 mm

5SV8706-0KK

5SV8 900-1KK OEZ:42668 Holder on “U“ rail according to EN OEZ:60715 wide 35 mm for 0.01 2
current transformers with internal diameter up to and including
5SVOEZ:89000-1KK 105 mm
E7
3 terminals
CS-BD-T011 OEZ:24810 Clamp terminals 16 ÷ 150 Cu cables, flexibars 0.24 1
CS-BD-T011
CS-BD-B011 OEZ:24751 Block terminals 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al cables 0.21 1

CS-BD-B011
CS-BD-B012 OEZ:17534 Block terminals 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al cables 0.2 1

- using the OD-BD-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
CS-BD-B012
CS-BD-B021 OEZ:24752 Double block terminals 2x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al cables 0.51 1
CS-BD-B022 OEZ:13808 Double block terminals 2x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al cables 0.62 1
CS-BD-B022
CS-BD-B014 OEZ:20119 Block terminals 6 x (6 ÷ 35) Cu/Al cables 0.3 1

- for 6 cables
CS-BD-B014
CS-BD-A021 OEZ:24770 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.237 1

CS-BD-A021
CS-BD-PS01 OEZ:13682 Potential terminals 1.5 ÷ 2.5; 4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor 0.017 1

CS-BD-PS01
CS-BD-A011 OEZ:24750 Front connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.12 1

flexibars
CS-BD-A011 - included in every supply of switching units
1 terminal
Type Order code Description S [mm2] Method of connection Weight [kg] Package [set]
CS-BD-T411 OEZ:19578 Clamp terminal 16 ÷ 150 Cu cables, flexibars 0.08 1
CS-BD-T411
CS-BD-B411 OEZ:19582 Block terminal 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al cables 0.07 1

CS-BD-B411
CS-BD-B412 OEZ:19577 Block terminal 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al cables 0.07 1

CS-BD-B412
1)
E8
1 terminal
Type Order code Description S [mm2] Method of connection Weight [kg] Package [pc]
CS-BD-B421 OEZ:19579 Double block terminal 2x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al cables 0.17 1
CS-BD-B421
CS-BD-B422 OEZ:19580 Double block terminal 2x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al cables 0.21 1
CS-BD-B422
CS-BD-B414 OEZ:21170 Block terminal 6x (6 ÷ 35) Cu/Al cables 0.1 1

- for 6 cables
CS-BD-B414 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E19
CS-BD-A421 OEZ:19581 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.08 1

CS-BD-A421
CS-BD-PS41 OEZ:36031 Potential terminal 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 0.005 1

CA-BD-PS41
CONNECTING SETS 3P
3 terminals
Type Order code Description Method of connection Weight [kg] Package [pc]
CS-BD-A037 OEZ:24772 Reduction for BA...*37-50 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.3 1
- front connection flexibars
CS-BD-A037
CS-BD-A039 OEZ:24771 Reduction for BA...*39-50 a J2UX50 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.447 1
- for total replacement of BA …*39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection OD-BHD-MS39 connecting set is necessary
REPLACEMENT OF FORMERLY PRODUCED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CS-BD-A039
CS-BD-Z039 OEZ:18201 Reduction for BA...*39 a J2UX Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.739 1
- rear connection flexibars
- for total replacement of BA…*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection OD-BD-MZ39 and CS-BD-A021 connecting sets are necessary
CS-BD-Z039
CS-BD-JX75 OEZ:18023 Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - Cu/Al busbars, 0.558 1
front connection, withdrawable design cable lugs, flexibars
- for total replacement of BA…*39-75 or J2UX75T circuit breakers with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting
set and ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BD-JX75
CS-BD-JT75 OEZ:18024 Reduction for J2UX75T - front Cu/Al busbars, 0.711 1

connection, withdrawable design cable lugs, flexibars
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set and
ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BD-JT75
E9
MOUNTING SETS 3P

OD-BHD-MS39 OEZ:24741 Reduction for BA...*39-50 and J2UX50 - front connection 0.7 1
- DIMENSIONS see page E28
- for total replacement of BA …*39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection 2 connecting sets CS-BD-A039 are necessary
OD-BHD-MS39
OD-BD-MZ39 OEZ:18203 Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX - rear connection 1.255 1
-DIMENSIONS see page E28
- for total replacement of BA…*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection 2 connecting sets CS-BD-Z039 and CS-BD-A021 are necessary
OD-BD-MZ39
OD-BD-MT75 OEZ:33330 Reduction for J2UX75T - front connection, withdrawable design 1

- DIMENSIONS see page E34, E38
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 connecting sets CS-BD-JT75 and
ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-BD-MT75
OD-BHD-MS75 OEZ:14563 Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - front connection, 0.446 1
withdrawable design
- DIMENSIONS see page E34, E37
- for total replacement of BA...*39-75 or J2UX75 circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 connecting sets CS-BD-JX75
and ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-MHD-MS75
1)
- one set provides for replacing one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
E10
SWITCHES 3P 4P
Single make contacts
PS-BHD-1000 OEZ:24700 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.012 1
PS-BHD-1000-Au OEZ:24702 AC/DC 5 ÷ 60 V 0.012 1
PS-BHD-1000 Single break contacts

PS-BHD-0100 OEZ:24701 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.013 1
Double
PS-BHD-0100 Type Order code Operating voltage Contacts Weight [kg] Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0200 OEZ:13690 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.026 1
PS-BHD-1100 OEZ:13691 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.025 1
PS-BHD-1100 PS-BHD-2000 OEZ:13689 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.024 1
Make-and-break
PS-BHD-0010 OEZ:18021 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.013 1
PS-BHD-0020 OEZ:35893 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.026 1
PS-BHD-0010
Early
SP-BHD-0002 OEZ:16169 Early contact 0.045 1
SP-BHD-0002 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION for all switch, see page E61
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P

SV-BHD-X024 OEZ:24650 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X110 OEZ:24630 AC/DC 110 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X230 OEZ:24620 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X230 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E62
SP-BHD-X024 OEZ:24450 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X110 OEZ:24430 AC/DC 110 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X230 OEZ:24420 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X230 SP-BHD-X024-00011) OEZ:24550 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V early contact 0.12 1
1)
SP-BHD-X110-0001 OEZ:24530 AC/DC 110 V early contact 0.12 1
SP-BHD-X230-00011) OEZ:24520 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V early contact 0.12 1
1)
cannot be used in combination with motor drive MP-BD-X...
DELAY UNIT
BZ-BX-X230-A OEZ:36696 enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers 0.12 1
Modeion
BZ-BX-X230-A
E11
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P

RP-BD-CK10 OEZ:13651 Hand drive unit - without locking 0.223 1
RP-BD-CK20 OEZ:13652 Hand drive unit - with locking 0.223 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on circuit breaker - with the black hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP10 or RP-BHD-CP20
for control through the switchboard door - with the extension shaft RP-BHD-CH..
RP-BD-CK10 - with the hand drive bearing RP-BHD-CN..
- with the hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK21 OEZ:13684 Hand drive unit - yellow label - with locking 0.223 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on circuit breaker - with the red hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP21
- with the hand drive bearing RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BD-CK21
RP-BD-CK30 OEZ:37250 Hand drive unit for right side control 0.484 1
RP-BD-CK31 OEZ:37251 Hand drive unit left side control 0.484 1
RP-BD-CK30
RP-BHD-CP10 OEZ:13655 Hand drive lever - black - without locking 0.075 1

RP-BHD-CP20 OEZ:13656 Hand drive lever - black - with locking 0.075 1
RP-BHD-CP10
RP-BHD-CP21 OEZ:13657 Hand drive lever - red - with locking 0.075 1

RP-BHD-CP21
RP-BHD-CN40 OEZ:37246 Hand drive bearing - degree 0.14 1

of protection IP40
- is used in combination with the black lever of RP-BHD-CP10, RP-BHD-CP20 hand drives
RP-BHD-CN40

- yellow label of protection IP40
- is used in combination with the red lever of RP-BHD-CP21 hand drive
RP-BHD-CN41

of protection IP66
RP-BHD-CN60
RP-BHD-CN61 OEZ:37249 Hand drive bearing - yellow label degree 0.14 1

- degree of protection IP66 of protection IP66
RP-BHD-CN61
E12
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P

RP-BHD-CH10 OEZ:13658 Extension shaft - length 365 mm, can be shortened 0.205 1
RP-BHD-CH10
RP-BHD-CH20 OEZ:13659 Extension shaft - telescopic, length 252 ÷ 416 mm 0.255 1

RP-BHD-CH20

RP-BHD-CB10 OEZ:18290 Mechanical interlocking - for fixed design 0.16 1
RP-BHD-CB10 - mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BD-CK..
2 hand drive levers RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CD10 OEZ:18289 Mechanical parallel switching - for fixed design 0.23 1

RP-BHD-CD10 - mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BD-CK..
the hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
MB-BD-PV05 OEZ:19612 Mechanical interlocking - for two circuit breakers BD250 0.448 1
MB-BHD-PV03 OEZ:19613 Mechanical interlocking - for one BD250 and one BH630 0.448 1
circuit breaker
MB-BD-PV05 - mechanical blocking with Bowden cable is intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Type Order code Name - description Operating voltage Weight [kg] Package [pc]
1)
MP-BD-X024 OEZ:36884 Motor drive AC/DC 24 V 1.529 1
MP-BD-X0481) OEZ:19790 Motor drive AC/DC 48 V 1.529 1
MP-BD-X110 OEZ:13537 Motor drive AC/DC 110 V 1.529 1
MP-BD-X230 OEZ:13535 Motor drive AC 230 V/ DC 220 V 1.529 1
MP-BD-X048-P1) OEZ:19791 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC/DC 48 V 1.546 1
MP-BD-X110-P1) OEZ:13686 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC/DC 110 V 1.546 1
MP-BD-X230 MP-BD-X230-P1) OEZ:13538 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC 230 V/ DC 220 V 1.546 1
- motor drive cannot be used in combination with SP-BHD-X...-0001
1)
custom production
OD-BHD-PP01 OEZ:13688 Counter of cycles - cable length 1.1 m 0.08 1

OD-BHD-PP01
- DIMENSIONS see page E30
OD-BHD-KA02 OEZ:13809 Extension cable - to motor drive 12 wires, length 0.6 m 0.1 1
OD-BHD-KA02
CONTROL RELAY
Type Order code Specifications Weight [kg] Package [pc]
OD-BHD-RX01 OEZ:37425 AC/DC 24 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RA03 OEZ:37427 AC 110 ÷ 230 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RD04 OEZ:37428 DC 110 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RA03
E13
ACCESSORIES 3P 4P

OD-BHD-KS02 OEZ:24740 Insulating barriers - set (two pieces), for 3P and 4P design 0.077 1
OD-BHD-KS42 OEZ:19575 Insulating barrier - one piece, for 4P design 0.039 1
- included with each switching unit order
- in case circuit breaker/switch-disconnector connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary in most cases to install
these barriers also on the lower side
OD-BHD-KS02 - for more detailed information see page E22
OD-BD-KS03 OEZ:13534 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 3P design 0.098 1
OD-BD-KS43 OEZ:19576 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 4P design 0.141 1
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using CS-BD-B012, B021, B022 and B014 block type terminals
- intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
OD-BD-KS03
OD-BD-UP01 OEZ:13533 Lever with locking 0.009 1

- enables to lock the circuit breaker in „switched off manually“ position (loaded)
OD-BD-UP01
OD-BD-VP01 OEZ:15328 Bolt sealing insert 0.001 2

- enables sealing for: - cover of cavities
- terminal cover
- overcurrent release
- hand drive unit
OD-BD-VP01 - motor drive
OD-BD-VP02 OEZ:18215 Additional cover for overcurrent release 0.08 1

- enables sealing for overcurrent releases such as circuit breakers in the main meter switchboard
OD-BD-VP02
OD-BHD-KA01 OEZ:14555 Connecting cable - to connect the circuit breaker/ 0.12 1

/switch-disconnector accessories in the plug-in/
/withdrawable design - 15 wires
(it is possible for plug-in design and fixed design)
OD-BHD-KA01
SO-BHD-0010 OEZ:14560 Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker position 0.018 1

in the plug-in or withdrawable device
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E50, E52
SO-BHD-0010
OD-BD-KK01 OEZ:14559 Keying set - prevents inserting in the plug-in or 0.002 1

withdrawable devices beyond the switching unit
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E50, E52
OD-BD-KK01
OD-BHD-KT01 OEZ:14642 Cover of switch on button - for motor drive, cover can 0.002 1
be sealed
OD-BHD-KT01
E14
BD250N, BD250S Technical information Modeion

Type BD250N, BD250S
Weight (3P/4P design) 3 kg/4 kg 3 kg/4 kg
Standards EN 60947-2, IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Rated current In 100, 160, 200, 250 A -
Rated normal current Iu 250 A 250 A
- max. AC 440 V
Circuit breaker Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V 690 V
Utilization category (switching mode) AC 690 V - AC-23B
DC 440 V - DC-23B
Rated short-time withstand current at Ue = AC 690 V Icw / t 2.5 kA/1 s 3 kA/5 s
Series NORMAL SUPERIOR

Ue -
BD250N BD250S
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (rms) 1) Icu 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V
36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
-
16 kA 25 kA AC 500 V
10 kA 13 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms) Ics 30 kA 50 kA AC 230 V
18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
-
8 kA 13 kA AC 500 V
5 kA 8 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm / Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 4 kA/ AC 415 V
- - - 4 kA/ DC 440 V
Application in IT network Ue AC 690 V -
Switching off time at Icu 10 ms -
Losses per 1 pole fixed/withdrawable design 18 W/25 W 18 W/25 W
Switch-disconnector Mechanical endurance 20 000 cycles 20 000 cycles
Electrical endurance 3 000 cycles 3 000 cycles
Control force 80 N 80 N
Reference ambient temperature 40 °C 40 °C
Dimensions Working environment dry and tropical climate dry and tropical climate
Plug-in design 3P/4P z/z z/z
Installation positions - fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
Withdrawable design 3P/4P z/z z/z
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/z/z/z z/z/z/z
Shunt trip z z
Undervoltage release/with early switch z/z z/z

Front hand drive/with adjustable lever z/z z/z
Mechanical interlocking-with Bowden cable/for hand drive z/z z/z
Motor drive/with counter of cycles z/z z/z
LOAD Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for overcurrent release z/z z/z
Connection of switch-disconnector for DC circuits 1)
in case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change
E15
Modeion BD250N, BD250S Technical information
Diagram
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízení
Plug-in/withdrawable device
2 4 1 1 3 5
S
ZO-BD
OF F SO 1
B
ZV -BD
Motorový pohon
Motor drive Pomocné spouště
Auxiliary / Předstihový
releases spínač
/ Early switch Main circuit
Hlavní obvod
D1
10 .Y 1
D1
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
C1
1 3 5
9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 SE-BD
A
SP-BHD-X...-0001
SP-BHD-0002
SV -BHD-X...
NC NO
SP-BHD-X...
S5
C
or or or Q
V
M P B
T1
TEST T2
MP T3
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 4
8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6
dutinaNo.
cavity
dutina č. 10
10
č.10
PE N- ZO-BD
SO 2 SO 3
ZV -BD
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Poč. cyklů
Counter
Počítadlo
of cyklů
cycles Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízení
Diagram description (3P and 4P design)

Propojovací cable
Connecting kabel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MP motor drive - MP-BD-X...
M motor
X2 P storage device
X3 connector for connection of control circuits
X4 connector for external counter of cycles
Spínače
Switches
návěstní
signal relativní
relative pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary
S5 switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
YC external counter of cycles - OD-BHD-PP01
1. 1
2. 1
1. 2
1. 4
3. 1
1. 3
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
2. 3
3. 3
2. 3
3. 3
2. 2
3. 2
2. 4
3. 4
2.2
3.2
2.4
3.4
B recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of motor drive

A
ON switch on button
S switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage,
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
switch may be continuously switched on)

or or
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page E69
J switching unit - BD250..305
Q main contacts
T1, T2, T3, T41) current transformers
B V trip-free mechanism
SE-BD circuit breaker - overcurrent release - SE-BD-....-.... switch-disconnector
- switch-disconnector unit - SE-BD-0250-V001
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0020
or or or or or or or or
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
TEST push button to test release

ZO-BD plug-in device - ZO-BD-0250-300
ZV-BD withdrawable device - ZV-BD-0250-300
X1, X2 connecting cable - OD-BHD-KA01
2. 1
2. 2
2. 2
3. 1
3. 4
2. 4
2. 2
2.1
3.1
1. 2
3. 4
2. 4
3. 2
1. 1
1. 4
3. 2
3. 4
SO1, SO2, SO3 contacts signalling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector position in

cavity
dutinaNo.
dutina č.č.111 cavity
dutinaNo.
dutina č.222
č. cavity
dutinaNo.
č.333
č. cavity
dutinaNo.
dutinač.č.222+++333
plug-in or withdrawable device SO-BHD-0010 - for more detailed
information see page E50, E52
SP-BHD-X... undervoltage release
X1 SV-BHD-X... shunt trip
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SP-BHD-X...-0001 undervoltage release with early contact
Propojovací cable
Connecting kabel SP-BHD-0002 early contact
1)
only for 4-pole design of BD250..406 switching unit
E16
Diagram
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
2 4 1 N 1 3 5
S
ZO-BD
OF F SO 1
B
ZV -BD
Motorový pohon
releases spínač
/ Early switch Hlavní
Mainobvod
circuit
D1
10 .Y 1
D1
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
C1
N 1 3 5
9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 SE-BD
A
SP-BHD-X...-0001
SP-BHD-0002
SV -BHD-X...
NC NO
SP-BHD-X...
S5
C
or or or Q
V
M P B
T1
TEST T2
MP T3
1)
T4
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 4
8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
X3 X4 J N 2 4 6
cavity
dutinaNo.
dutinač.č.10
10
10
PE N- ZO-BD
SO 2 SO 3
ZV -BD
1 4 2 1 4 2 N 2 4 6
Poč. cyklů
Counter
Počítadlo
of cyklů
cycles Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízenídevice
Plug-in/withdrawable
Propojovací
Connectingkabel
cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Spínaèe Spínače
Switches
návěstní
signal relativní
relative pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary
1. 1
2. 1
1. 2
1. 4
3. 1
5. 1
6. 1
1. 3
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
4. 1
2. 3
4. 3
3. 3
5. 3
6. 3
2. 3
3. 3
2. 2
3. 2
4. 2
5. 2
6. 2
2. 4
3. 4
4. 4
5. 4
6. 4
2.2
3.2
2.4
3.4
A
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
or or
B
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0020
or or or or or or or or or or or or or
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
2. 1
4. 1
2. 2
2. 2
4. 2
3. 1
5. 1
6. 1
3. 4
2. 4
2. 2
2.1
3.1
1. 2
3. 4
5. 4
6. 4
2. 4
3. 2
4. 4
1. 1
1. 4
3. 2
5. 2
6. 2
3. 4
cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.111 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.222 cavity
dutinaNo.
č. 33
č.3 cavity
dutinaNo.
dutinač.č.22++33 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.
č.444 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.555 cavity
dutinač.6
dutina No.
č. 66
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Propojovací cable
Connecting kabel
E17

Power circuit Recommended min. cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables and possibly ca- Cables S [mm2] Busbars W x H [mm]
bles with cable lugs IR (In) [A]
Cu Al Cu Al
connection sets are produced to provide greater connect-

40 10 16 - -
ing options, see page E8 50 10 16 - -
generally, conductors from the supply are connected 63 16 25 - -

to input terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to 80 25 35 - -
terminals 2, 4, 6; however, it is possible to reverse the con- 100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2
nection (exchanging input and output terminals without
limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu) 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
160 70 95 25 x 3 25 x 4
in case of reversed connection, in the majority of cases,
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector must be fitted with 200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers also on the side of ter- 250 120 150 25 x 5 25 x 6
minals 2, 4, 6, for more detailed information see page E22 - it is necessary to follow the relevant valid standards when cables are designed
we recommend painting the connecting busbars
Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature
input and output conductors/busbars must be Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BD250 - connection by Cu cable 1x 120 mm2 per pole
mechanically reinforced in order to avoid transfer- 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
ring electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector during short-circuiting 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A
the method of connecting the power circuit must

observe the deionization spaces of the circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector, see page E23 Mechanical reinforcement of conductors
for BD250
Auxiliary circuits
switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected Ik ≤ 25 kA
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 di-
rectly to terminals on these devices
Ik ≤ 65 kA
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or withdra-
wable design are connected using a connector
E18

Type Imax [A] Cable - ranges of connection cross-sections S [mm2]
Busbars and cable Dimensional

lugs W x H [mm] drawing 3P/4P
CS-BD-A011 250 25 x ...
CS-BD-A021
250 25 x ... page E27, E41
CS-BD-B421
CS-BD-T011
250 16 ÷ 150 Cu 10 ÷ 150 Cu 16 ÷ 150 Cu 10 ÷ 150 Cu
CS-BD-T411
CS-BD-B011
250 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al 16 ÷ 150 Cu/Al 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al 16 ÷ 150 Cu/Al
CS-BD-B411
CS-BD-B012
250 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al 120 ÷ 240 Cu/Al 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al 120 ÷ 240 Cu/Al page E24, E39
CS-BD-B412
CS-BD-B021
250 2x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al 2x (16 ÷ 150) Cu/Al 2x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al 2x (16 ÷ 150) Cu/Al page E24, E39
CS-BD-B421
CS-BD-B022
CS-BD-B422
CS-BD-B014
CS-BD-B414
CS-BD-A037 250 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*37 with front connection page E26, E41
CS-BD-A039 250 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 and J2UX with front connection page E27
CS-BD-Z039 250 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 and J2UX with rear connection page E28
CS-BD-JX75 250 Reduction for circuit breaker BA...39-75 and J2UX75 with front connection in plug-in or withdrawable device page E28
CS-BD-JT75 250 Reduction for circuit breaker J2UX75T with front connection in plug-in or withdrawable device page E34, E38
CS-BD-PS01 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor
CS-BD-PS41 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor
ø8
,5
,5
12 25
CS-BD-A01 1
25
OD-BHD-KS02 CS-BD-A021
2.
Click ! 3.
6.
BD250...
F
7.
BD250...
1.
3.
3.
193
1.
2.
M8
4.
4.
5.
12,5
12.5
8. 5.
6.
15 Nm ... 6
15 Nm ... 6
9. 7.
0,8 Nm
0.8 Nm
0,8 Nm
0.8 Nm
E19
Front connection - Cu cables Front connection - Cu/Al cables cables - up to 150 mm2
CS-BD-T011
CS-BD-B011
OD-BHD-KS02 OD-BHD-KS02
BD250...
6. BD250...
7. F 7.
8. F
3.
4.
2.
173
Click !
2.
3.
Click !
15 Nm ... 6 mm
1.
173
20
1.
6. 16 ÷ 50 mm2 Al, Cu ... 15 Nm ... 6 mm

20
8. 5. 70 ÷ 150 mm 2 Al, Cu ... 20 Nm ... 6 mm

5. 2
10 ÷ 50 mm Cu ... 15 Nm ... 5 mm 9.
4.
25
70 ÷ 150 mm 2 Cu ... 20 Nm ... 5 mm
9.
25
0.8 Nm
10.
0.8 Nm
Front connection - Cu/Al cables up to 240 mm2 Front connection - 2 Cu/Al cables
CS-BD-B012 CS-BD-B021
OD-BHD-KS02 OD-BHD-KS02
2. 2.
OD-BD-KS03
or OD-BD-KS03
or
Click ! 3.
IP20
Click ! 3.
8.
IP20
8.
F F
BD250... BD250...
8. 8.
F F
5. 5.
9. 9.
10. 15 Nm ... 6 10. 15 Nm ... 6
1. 1.
M8 M8
4. 4.
301
273
7.
7.
6.
120 ÷ 150 mm 2 6. 16 ÷ 50 mm2
Al , Cu ... 25 Nm ... 8 mm
Al, Cu ... 15 Nm ... 6 mm
30
8. 8.
185 ÷ 240 mm 2
25
43
F F 70 ÷ 150 mm 2
Al , Cu ... 30 Nm ... 8 mm
Al, Cu ... 20 Nm ... 6 mm
11.
0.8 Nm 11. 0.8 Nm
E20
Front connection - 6 Cu/Al cables Front connection - cable lugs
OD-BHD-KS02 CS-BD-B014 CS-BD-A011

or
OD-BD-KS03
IP20 OD-BHD-KS02
2.
2.
Click ! 3. or OD-BD-KS03
8.
F 6.
IP20 Click ! 3.
F
8.
BD250...
6.
F
7. F
5.
9.
10.
CS-BD-B014 8.
15 Nm ... 6 1.
M8 1.
M8
4. 25
4.
25 ÷ 150 mm2 Cu ( Klauke )

287
5.
25 ÷ 120 mm2 Al ( Klauke )
13
8.5
7.
6. 2
6 ÷ 16 mm 15 Nm ... 6
Cu, Al... 4 Nm... 4 mm
37.5
2
16 ÷ 35 mm
26
6.
8. Cu, Al... 6 Nm... 4 mm F
F
14.5
9.
0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
11.
Front connection - BD reduction for BA…*37 circuit breaker Front connection - BD reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 and J2UX
CS-BD-A037 CS-BD-A039
OD-BHD-KS02 2.
2.
OD-BHD-KS02 Click !
Click ! 3.
3.
BD250...
6.
F
BD250... 6.
7.
7. F
1.
1. M8
M8
4.
4.
308
273
15 Nm ... 6
1
ø1
1
ø1
15 Nm ... 6
5.
8.
8.
25
50 50
5.
70
70
9.
9. 0.8 Nm
22
0.8 Nm
44
E21
Rear connection - BD reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 and J2UX with rear connection
70 70 44
NOT INCLUDED IN ORDER
ø1
25
1
308
15
15 Nm
CS-BD-A021 CS-BD-Z039
2.
1.
15 Nm ... 6
BD250...
MAX. 20
3.
5.
4.
15 Nm ... 6
6.
0.8 Nm
Deionization spaces
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5 a) if Ue ≥ AC 415 V, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or a OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
(upper side)
b) if insulated conductors are not used for connecting power circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or rear
connection, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or a OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
- terminals 2, 4, 6 only in case that circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the source using terminals
(lower side) 2, 4, 6 and furthermore:
a) if Ue ≥ AC 415 V, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or a OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
- rear connection - insulating barriers and terminal covers need not be used
PLUG-IN AND WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE - insulating barriers and terminal covers need not be used
E22
Deionization spaces
C=20 B=105 B=105 B=105 C=20
H
OD-BHD-KS02 E=105 G=80 A…minimum distance between the circuit breaker/

/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
(applicable for connection using insulated conductors,
cables, flexibars or with rear connection)
A2
A1…minimum insulation length of bare conductors
100-150
A1
(using OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers from 100 mm

to max. 150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for
the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A
F=0 G=0 A2…minimum distance:

- between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and
uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated
conductors and busbars)
busbar
225
- between two circuit breakers/switch-disconnec-

tors situated vertically above one another
- between uninsulated connections of two circuit bre-
akers/switch-disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, G…minimum distance between the circuit
20
breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated ear-

thed wall
H…minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
minimum distance of circuit breakers without using
of uninsulated barriers is 50 mm
H
Pas
max.3 mm
> 15 mm
max.3 mm
Cable
Kabel
Flexibar
When insulating conductors, cables, flexibars or rear connection are used up

to U <= AC 415 V, it is not necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers.
U [V] 230 415 500 690

BD250S wired with Ik” [kA] ≤ 100 > 36 ÷ 65 ≤ 36 ≤ 25 ≤ 13
BD250N wired with Ik” [kA] ≤ 60 ≤ 36 ≤ 16 ≤ 10
G [mm] H [mm]
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 10 A1 [mm] 100 150 100 150 150
< 80 A2 [mm] 200 250 200 250 250
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 30 A1 [mm] 100 150 100 150 150
A2 [mm] 150 200 150 200 200
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 80 ≥ 10 A1 [mm] 100 150 100 150 150
A2 [mm] 150 200 150 200 200
Note: Ik“ - max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms)
E23
Dimensions
35 35
2 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

100
25 4
18
35
48
60
26°
17°
65
213
193
167
154
162
225
162
29.5
29,5
2°
R88
,55
55.
121
xøø
44x
35,5
35.5
31.5
31,5
16 20 35 35
Ø
ø8
105
8.,5
5
26
105 117 5
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BD-B012 connecting set)
105
105 42
35 35 25
35
273
248
225
193
162
335
223
30
ø22
E24
Dimensions
105
105 40 24
35 35 25
35
193
261
301
281
244
225
335
224
162
25
Ø18 Ø18
E25
Dimensions
105
42 28
105
25
35 35
35
319
294
248
225
193
162
335
219
269
30
Ø22 Ø22
105
58
47
36
105 24
35 35
24 24
35
287
269
246
225
223
193
162
335
213
236
259
11
25
ø8,4
ø8.4 ø8,4
ø8.4
ø8,4
ø8.4
E26
Dimensions
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BD-A021 connecting set) Drilling diagram
46 105 98
35 35 35
2
20
7,5
7.5
8.5
8,5
21
4x
35 ø5
.,5
48
65
225
193
193
154
193
162
162
225
1,5
1.5
R6
øø5
8.,55
16
28
105 36 35
16
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BD-A037 connecting set)
105
50 50
35 35
29 4
24
35
273
193
162
225
36,5
36.5
ø1
1
32 32
12.5
12,5
E27
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BD-A039 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS39 mounting set)
70 70
35 35 3 29 4
25
35
308
193
162
360
225
105
81,5
81.5
ø1
1
25
ø1
1
15
32 32
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BD-Z039 connecting set, OD-BD-MZ39 mounting set)
210 4 29,5
29.5 3
11
Ø7
xØ
70 8 32
4x
15
12
25
140
105
36
395
225
360
307
25
46 105
70 70
E28
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive
42,5
42.5
BH250...
RP-BD-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
37
50
133
50
°
90
140
25°

RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK..
70 RP-BHD-CN..
BD250... RP-BHD-CH..
37
70
50
133
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
140
25°
180 ÷ 495 (CH10)
375 ÷ 540 (CH20)
MIN. 145 27.5
6.5
4x
SWITCHBOARD DOOR HINGE
55
50
55
E29
Dimensions
105
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BHD-CN..
°
90
RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK30
45°
RP-BHD-CH...
133
BD250...
30 163
67 ÷ 380 (CH10) 71
256 ÷ 445 (CH20)
105
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BD-CK31
RP-BHD-CN.. 70
RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CH...
133
°
90
BD250...
45°
50 163
71 88 ÷ 400 (CH10)
276 ÷ 465 (CH20)
Fixed design, MP-BD-X... motor drive Opening dimensions in switchboard

door for external counter of cycles
.9
R487
1
ax
m
R
14
27
195
138
82
247
E30
Dimensions
Plug-in device Drilling diagram
25 4
35 35 18
55
øø55,.
44xx
5
ø 55,.5
44xxø
145
35
290
278
258
232
140
162
193
227
227
290
140
20
26
75
75
31,5
31,5
31.5
31.5
16 20 35 35 35 35
øø8
,.5
26 35
105
105
Plug-in device, OD-BD-KS03 terminal cover
103
70
105 35
105
400
E31
Dimensions
Plug-in design Drilling diagram
46
105
2
20 105 98 98
7,5
7.5
21
21
8,5
52
7.5
258
140
258
290
227
258
.,5
ø5
4x
,.55
øø55
45
44xx
1.5
1,5
R6
75
ø8.5
16
,5
28
28
36 35 35 35 35
16
31,5
31.5
Plug-in design
182
105 105
290
140
157
E32
Dimensions
Plug-in design, hand drive
225
175
Plug-in design, motor drive
282 31
E33
Dimensions
Plug-in device (CS-BD-JX75 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS75 mounting set)

2x ø
10
10 70 70 20 5
25
106,5
106.5
4x
ø5
483
433
180
290
106,5
106.5
25
160
Plug-in device (CS-BD-JT75 connecting set, OD-BD-MT75 mounting set)

2x
10
ø1 70 70 20 5
1
25
154
151,5
4x
ø6
180
290
578
528
154
25
160
E34
Dimensions
Withdrawable device Drilling diagram
25 4
.,55
35 35 18 øø55
44xx
.,5
ø5
4x
145
35
193
140
227
227
290
140
162
290
278
258
232
20
26
75
75
31.5
31.5
31,5
31,5
35 35
ø8
16 20
,.5
26 35
105 105
Withdrawable device, OD-BD-KS03 terminal cover
103
180 70
105 35
130
105
140
400
179 140 27,5

27.5
E35
Dimensions
Withdrawable design Working position Inspection position
212
179 182 105

105 105 30
74,9
74.9
75
65
140
290
140
180 140 170
157 187
Withdrawable design, hand drive Working position Inspection position
255
225 30
75.2
75,2
75
140
140
175 205
E36
Dimensions
Withdrawable design, motor drive Working position Inspection position
312 31
282 31 30
75
75
140
140
Withdrawable device (CS-BD-JX75 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS75 mounting set)

2x
10
ø1
70 70 20 5
0
25
106.5
106,5
75
140
290
483
433
180
4x
ø5
106.5
106,5
25
160
E37
Dimensions
Withdrawable device (CS-BD-JT75 connecting set, OD-BD-MT75 mounting set)
10
2x 20 5
ø1 70 70
1
25
154
151.5
151,5
ø6
4x
75
180
578
528
290
140
154
25
160
Withdrawable device, rear connection (CS-BD-A021 connecting set)
46
98
2
20 105
4
7,5
7.5
21
52
140
258
258
,.5
ø5
4x
45
ø8
75
16
.,5
28
17
37 35 35
E38
Dimensions
35 35 35
103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

25 4
18
35
48
60
26°
17°
65
213
193
167
154
162
225
162
29,5
29.5
2°
R88
121
5
5.,5
øø5
44xx
35,5
35.5
31,5
31.5
16 20 70 35 35
105
ø8
,.5
26 117 5
140
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BD-B012 + CS-BD-B412 connecting sets)
105
42
25
35 35 35
35
273
248
225
193
162
335
223
140
30
ø22
E39
Dimensions
105
40 24
25
35 35 35
35
261
224
301
281
244
225
193
162
335
140
25
Ø18 Ø18
105
42 28
25
35 35 35
35
193
248
225
162
335
319
294
219
269
30
Ø22 Ø22
E40
Dimensions
105
58
47
36
24
35 35 35
35
225
213
236
259
287
269
246
223
193
162
335
140
25 11
ø8,4
ø8.4 ø8,4
ø8.4
ø8,4
ø8.4
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BD-A021 + CS-BD-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
46 105 133
2
35 35 35 20 35
7.5
7,5
8,5
8.5
21
35
48
65
162
193
225
193
154
162
225
ø6 .,5
ø5
1,5
1.5
4x
ø8
,.5
16
28
140 36 35
16
E41
Dimensions
77,5
77.5
BH250...
RP-BD-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
37
50
133
50
°
90
140
25°
RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK..
70 RP-BHD-CN..
BD250... RP-BHD-CH..
37
70
50
133
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL PANEL
ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
140
25°
180 ÷ 495 (CH10)
375 ÷ 540 (CH20)
MIN. 145 27.5
6.5
4x
55
50
55
E42
Dimensions
Fixed design, motor drive Opening dimensions in switchboard

door for external counter of cycles
.9
RR448877
,9
1
ax
m
R
14
27
195
138
82
140 247
25 4
35 35 35 18
,.5
ø5
4x
.,55
øø55
44xx
145
35
227
193
140
162
227
140
290
278
258
232
290
20
26
75
75
31.5
31.5
31,5
31,5
16 20 35 35
ø8
35 35
,.5
26 35
140 105
E43
Dimensions
Plug-in device, OD-BD-KS43 terminal cover
103
70
140 35
105
400
Plug-in design
182
140 105
290
140
157
E44
Dimensions
Plug-in design, rear connection (CS-BD-A021 + CS-BD-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
46 140
2
140 35
7.5
20 105
7,5
21
52
258
140
258
290
.,5
ø5
4x
45
75
ø8.
16
,5
28
36 35 35
16
E45
Dimensions
140 225
290
175
282 31
140
290
E46
Dimensions
25 4
214
18
35 35 35
,55
55.
xøø
44x
,.55
øø55
44xx
145
35
140
290
227
290
278
258
232
140
162
193
227
20
26
75
75
31.5
35.5
35,5
31,5
16 35 35
ø8 .
20
,5
26 35
140
105
215
Withdrawable device, OD-BD-KS43 terminal cover
103
215 70
140 35
130
105
140
400
140 27,5
27.5
E47
Dimensions
212
182 105
213
105 30
140
74,9
75
65
140
140
290
215 140 170
157 187
Withdrawable design, rear connection (CS-BD-A021 + CS-BD-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
46 133
213
20 105
2
35
4
140
7.5
7,5
21
65
52
258
140
290
4x
ø5
.,5
45
ø8
75
16
,.5
28
17
215 37 35 35
2
E48
Dimensions
255
213
225 30
140
75.2
75,2
75
65
140
140
290
215 175 205
Withdrawable design, motor drive Working position
213
282 31
140
75
65
140
290
Inspection position
312 31
30
75
215
140
E49
PLUG-IN DEVICE 3P 4P
Description
Plug-in device
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is Signalling of position SO-BHD-0010
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid Plug-in device may be fitted with a maximum of four
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for signalling
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed. the inserted/removed position.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for as-
sembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug- Keying set OD-BD-KK01
in design from the originally fixed design Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be fitted with keying set,
components of the plug-in device are: which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the plug-
- base of the plug-in device in device.
- 2 connecting sets (total of 6 terminals) - for fitting onto
the switching unit Circuit breaker accessories in plug-in design
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switch- Circuit breaker in plug-in design has the same accessories as
ing off of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting the fixed circuit breaker.
ZO-BD-0250-300
and removal)
- set of mounting bolts - for affixing circuit breaker to Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
plug-in device (set of mounting bolts is used to fasten unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker the plug-in device into the switchboard, that is included position
in plug-in design in delivery of switching unit) option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent insert-
ing of circuit breaker
Circuit breaker positions visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions: easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
1. inserted (working position) IP20 degree of protection of all termination points
2. removed plug-in device does not need earthing
Power circuit
connecting set CS-BD-A011 is used for connecting with
busbars or cable lugs, wthat is included in delivery of
BD250... switching unit
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use con-
necting sets, see page E8 OD-BD-KK01
connection must comply with our recommendations, see
page E18
Locking plug-in device against
inserting circuit breaker Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire cable OD-BHD-KA01.
OD-BHD-KA01
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in plug-in device
according to circuit breaker position
Cavity 11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)
1
Circuit breaker
position 2 4 SO-BHD-0010
Inserted 0 1
Removed 1 0
1)
cavities 19 and 20 are only for 4-pole design
Position of cavities
for switch SO-BHD-0010
in plug-in device Specifications SO-BHD-0010
Type SO-BHD-0010
DC 220 V
11, 12, 13, 14 Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 500 V
Rated operating current Ie / Ue AC-13 3 A / AC 400 V
Ie / Ue DC-15 3.5 A / DC 24 V, 1 A / DC 48 V, 0.3 A / DC 110 V, 0.15 A / DC 220 V
Keying set Arrangement of contacts 001
OD-BD-KK01 Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch) IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in plug-in device with accessories see page E16.
E50
Recommended circuit breaker manipulation

During the manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in
design with motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach the
state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor
drive is unsuccessful. Switching on is executed after repeat-
ed make impulse. To avoid this effect, some of the following
steps may be done:
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the

circuit breaker, see „Recommended circuit breaker
manipulation“ below
2) To connect OD-BHD-R… control relay into the motor
drive circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E73
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive
Recommended process of manipulation

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in de-
sign is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
sequence, after repeated insertion into the plug-in device:
1) press the switch off button (red) on the motor drive, see fig.
2) press the switch on button (green) on the motor drive, see fig.
1 2
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when removing circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker befor removing State of switches before removing - inserted position State of switches after removing - withdrawn position
1)
Cavity 1 2 3 (4, 5, 6) 1 2 3 (4, 5, 6)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
(loaded state)
Switched off by overcurrent release 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
button on the motor drive
1)
cavities 4, 5, 6 are only for 4-pole design
E51
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE 3P 4P
Description
Withdrawable device
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch-dis- Signalling of position SO-BHD-0010
connector is intended for demanding industrial applica- Withdrawable device can be fitted with the switches for
tions where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted/with-
checking and both visual and conductive disconnection of drawn/removed.
the circuit are needed.
Power circuit
withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
connecting set CS-BD-A011 is used for connecting with
assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in with-
busbars or cable lugs, that is included in delivery of
drawable design from the originally fixed design
BD250.. switching unit
components of the withdrawable device are:
- base of the withdrawable device
necting sets, see page E8
- 2 movable side plates
ZV-BD-0250-300 - 2 connecting sets (total of 6 terminals) - for fitting onto
page E18
the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switch- Auxiliary circuits
ing off of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting These are connected using 15-wire cable OD-BHD-KA01.
and withdrawing)
- set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable Circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design
device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has the same acces-
Circuit breaker
of switching unit sories as fixed circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker positions Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions: unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit
1. inserted (working position) breaker and arrestment positions
2. withdrawn (inspection position) checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
3. removed inspection position
locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit
Keying set OD-BD-KK01 breaker, locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating)
Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be fitted with position, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (check-
keying set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker ing) position - locking by means of padlocks
Locking withdrawable into the withdrawable device. visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
device against inserting
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
circuit breaker
device according to circuit breaker and arrestment IP20 degree of protection of all termination points
positions withdrawable device does not need earthing
11, 12, 13, 14 15, 17
Cavity 16, 18
(19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
1 1 1 OD-BD-KK01
Circuit breaker and

2 4 2 4 2 4
arrestment position
Inserted and not arrested 0 1 1 0 0 1
Locking withdrawable Inserted and arrested 0 1 1 0 1 0 OD-BHD-KA01
circuit breaker against Withdrawn and not arrested 1 0 0 1 0 1
tampering Withdrawn and arrested 1 0 0 1 1 0
Removed and not arrested 1 0 1 0 0 1
Removed and arrested 1 0 1 0 1 0
note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed SO-BHD-0010
- operating state is always in arrested position
- in arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable device (for
more information see„Advantages and enhanced safety for operator“)
Position of cavities for switch 1)
SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device
Specifications SO-BHD-0010
Type SO-BHD-0010
DC 220 V
15, 17
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 500 V
Rated operating current Ie / Ue AC-13 3 A / AC 400 V
Ie / Ue DC-15 3.5 A / DC 24 V, 1 A / DC 48 V, 0.3 A / DC 110 V, 0.15 A / DC 220 V
OD-BD-KK01 11, 12, 13, 14 Thermal current Ith 6A
16, 18 Ambient temperature range -25 °C ÷ +55 °C
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories see page E16.
E52

During the manipulation with circuit breaker in withdraw-
able design with motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach
the state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor
drive is unsuccessful. Switching on is executed after repeated
make impulse. To avoid this effect, some of the following
steps may be done:
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit

breaker, see „Recommended circuit breaker manipulation“
below
2) To connect OD-BHD-R… control relay into the motor drive
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E73
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design with motor drive

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
design is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
1 2
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawal State after insertion/withdrawal
State of circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion - withdrawn position State of switches after insertion - inserted position
State of circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal - inserted position State of switches after withdrawal - withdrawn position
1)
Cavity 1 2 3 (4, 5, 6) 1 2 3 (4, 5, 6)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
(loaded state)

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
1)
E53
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - DTV3 3P 4P
Reduced current Thermal memory Short-circuit release Properties

SE-BD-0100-DTV3 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
thermal memory can be switched on/off (ON = T(t), OFF = T(0))
setting of the value of the short-circuit release Ii in two
steps, 4 IR or 8 IR
setting of IR and Ii by means of the rotary switches is stepwise
the overcurrent release indicates operating state and the
value of the passing current by means of LED
by the manufacturer to minimum
In = 160 A
SE-BD-0160-DTV3
In = 250 A Data for the project

SE-BD-0250-DTV3
Switching unit BD250…
Overcurrent release SE-BD-…
Thermal memory T ….
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (…. x IR)
t
IR
IMPORTANT
thermal memory must be switched on in
protection of transformers and lines
- thus the transformer or the line will be
protected against repeated overload
Ii
E54
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - MTV8, TV mode 3P 4P
Reduced current Thermal release delay Short-circuit release Properties

In = 100 A TV mode - suitable for protection of lines, distribution
SE-BD-0100-MTV8 transformers and generators
in TV mode the undercurrent release is inactive
setting of delay of the thermal release tR 1 s, 3 s, 10 s and 20 s
setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps and
possibility of switching the short-circuit release off with
a delay of 50 ms
setting of IR, tR and Ii by means of the rotary switches is stepwise
In = 160 A
SE-BD-0160-MTV8

In = 250 A Overcurrent release setting
SE-BD-0250-MTV8
Mode TV
Thermal release delay tR …. s
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A
Setting of short-circuit release …. ms
t
IR
IMPORTANT
tR - conditions must be fulfilled for automatic
of failure
Ii
E55
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - MTV8, M mode 3P 4P
Reduced current Motor starting Short-circuit release Properties

In = 100 A M mode - suitable for protection of motors
SE-BD-0100-MTV8 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
in M mode the undercurrent release is active
setting of delay of the thermal release tR 3 s, 8 s, 15 s and
20 s according to the motor starting class
setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps and
possibility of switching the short-circuit release off with
a delay of 50 ms
In = 160 A
SE-BD-0160-MTV8

SE-BD-0250-MTV8
Mode M
t
IR
IMPORTANT
M mode must be selected in protection of motors
- the motor will be protected in phase failure
tR thermal release delay tR must correspond to
the motor starting class
in protection of motors it is suitable to set the
delay of the short-circuit release at 50 ms
Ii
E56
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - L001 3P 4P
In = 160 A
SE-BD-0160-L001
Properties
suitable for protection of lines with low impulse currents
reduced current cannot be set
thermal release cannot be switched off
short-circuit release is fixed at 4 In
In = 200 A
SE-BD-0200-L001
In = 250 A
SE-BD-0250-L001
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (4 x In)
t
In
IMPORTANT
Ii
E57
Rated current Motor starting Selective release Properties

In = 100 A TV mode suitable for protection of lines, distribution
SE-BD-0100-MTV9 transformers and generators – enables setting of time
selectivity
setting of the value of selective release Isd in 4 steps
(independent time-delayed release)
setting of delay of the selective release tsd 0 ms, 100 ms,
In = 160 A 200 ms or 300 ms
SE-BD-0160-MTV9
setting of IR, tR, Isd and tsd by means of rotary switches is stepwise

SE-BD-0250-MTV9
Mode TV
Selective release value Isd …. A (…x IR )

Selective release delay tsd …. ms
t
IR
IMPORTANT
of failure
Isd tsd
Ii
E58

In = 100 A M mode suitable for protection of motors – enables set-
SE-BD-0100-MTV9 ting of time selectivity
In = 160 A 200 ms or 300 ms
SE-BD-0160-MTV9

SE-BD-0250-MTV9
Mode M

t
IR
IMPORTANT
- the motor will be protected in phase
tR failure thermal release delay tR must correspond
to the motor starting class
Isd tsd
Ii
E59
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - 4D01 3P 4P
Short-circuit
Rated current Motor starting release Properties
SE-BD-0100-4D01 transformers with protected „N“ conductor in TN-C-S and
TN-S networks
setting of the value of the short-circuit release Ii in 4 steps
(2 ÷ 9) IR
setting of the value of reduced current IN and short-circuit
current IiN in the 4th pole
In = 160 A setting of IR, tR, IN and IiN by means of rotary switches is stepwise
SE-BD-0160-4D01

In = 250 A Overcurrent release SE-BD-…
SE-BD-0250-4D01 Overcurrent release setting
Level of reduced current in the 4th pole IN …. A (…x IR )
Level of reduced current in the 4th pole IiN … A (… x Ii )
t IR
IMPORTANT
IN
tR release must correspond to the impedance loop
of failure
Ii
E60
SWITCHES 3P 4P
Specification
Type PS-BHD-..00 PS-BHD-..00-Au1)
DC 60 ÷ 500 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
PS-BHD-1000 Rated operating current Ie / Ue AC-15 6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 2 A/500 V AC-12, DC-12 0.004 ÷ 0.5 A/5 V,
Ie / Ue DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.2 A/500 V 0.004 ÷ 0.01/60 V
Thermal current Ith 10 A 0.5 A
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 01, 10, 02, 11, 20
PS-BHD-1100
Type SP-BHD-0002 PS-BHD-0010/0020 PS-BHD-0010-Au/0020-Au1)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 250 V AC 60 ÷ 250 V AC 5 ÷ 60 V
- DC 60 ÷ 250 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V 250 V 250 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie / Ue 1 A / AC 250 V AC-15 1.5 A / AC 250 V AC-12, DC-12 0.004 ÷ 0.5 A / 5 V,
Ie / Ue - DC-13 0.2 A / DC 250 V 0.004 ÷ 0.01 / 60 V
PS-BHD-0010
Thermal current Ith - 6A 0.5 A
Arrangement of contacts 02, 11, 20 001/002 001/002
Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch) IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature range -25 °C ÷ +55 °C -25 °C ÷ +55 °C -25 °C ÷ +55 °C
1)
PS-BHD-....- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
PS-BHD-0020 Type designation, number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement
Arrangement of contacts Type Number of contacts Contact types
10 PS-BHD-1000 (-Au) 1 make
01 PS-BHD-0100 (-Au) 1 break
11 PS-BHD-1100 (-Au) 1+1 break+make
SP-BHD-0002 001 PS-BHD-0010 (-Au) 1 make-and-break
002 PS-BHD-0020(-Au) 2 make-and-break
Function and names of switches according to their location in cavities
Position of switch Switch name Switch function
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
Cavity 1 Signal signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
10 Cavity 2 Relative signals tripping of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector by releases, TEST push button
1 2 3
or by the switch off button on the motor drive
PS-BHD-....
Cavity 3 (4, 5, 6)2) Auxiliary switch signals position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector’s main contacts
Cavities in BD250... switching unit Cavity 10 Early makes/breaks in advance before making the main contact of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
2)
States of switches in the circuit breaker cavities
Cavity 1 2 3 (4, 5, 6)1) 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2 3
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-....-0001
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
State
of circuit breaker
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off manually or by motor drive
electrically (loaded state) 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Switched off by overcurrent release 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
1)
note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed cavities 4, 5, 6 are only for 4-pole design
E61
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Specifications
Type SV-BHD-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA
DC <3W
SV-BHD-X230
Loading time ∞
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X... Type designation according to rated
10
1 2 3
operating voltage
PS-BHD-.... Ue Type
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V SV-BHD-X024
Cavities in BD250... switching unit
AC/DC 110 V SV-BHD-X110
AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V SV-BHD-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the release is
set up by jumpers directly on the release. It is always
set to the maximum value by default (see fig. 1). Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching off by shunt trip
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
C1
20
3.4 3.3 1
3.4 3.3
0
Auxiliary switch
20
14 13 1
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch
C2
30
1
2.4 2.3
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.2 2.1
0
1
0
1
0
1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
50
t [ms ]
States and positions of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever

States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector Lever position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off

electrically (loaded state)
E62
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Specifications
Reaction time of the auxiliary releases

Shunt trip
1
SV
0
>50
1
OK
0
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip

It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the circuit breaker is
done by motor drive and shunt trip or undervoltage release. The following
time delays have to be kept between the disconnection of voltage from the
shunt trip or bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the control
impulse for switch on of the motor drive:
Shunt trip
HK 1
0
50
1
SV
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 700
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)
States and positions of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever Description of graphs

States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector Lever position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector Symbol Description
HK Main contacts
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
(loaded state) SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
E63
Specifications
Type SP-BHD-X… SP-BHD-X…-00012)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA < 3 VA
DC <3W <3W
Characteristic 1) U ≥ 0.85 Ue - it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
SP-BHD-X230 U ≤ 0.35 Ue - the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switching off 20 ms 20 ms
Loading time ∞ ∞
Degree of protection of terminals (connected release) IP20 IP20
Position in cavity No. 10 10
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
Early switch -
10
1 2 3 Rated operating voltage Ue - AC 250 V
PS-BHD-....
Rated frequency fn - 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie /Ue - 1 A / AC 250 V
Cavities in BD250... switching unit
Arrangement of contacts - 10, 01
Connection cross-section S - 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected release) - IP20
1)
2)
cannot be used in combination with motor drive MP-BD-X....
Number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement operating voltage
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types Ue Type
01 1 break AC 24, 40, 48 V SP-BHD-X024
10 1 make AC/DC 110 V SP-BHD-X110
AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V SP-BHD-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the re-
It is always set to the maximum value by default
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching (see fig. 1).
off by undervoltage release
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
D1
D1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
20
3.4 3.3 1
3.4 3.3
0
Auxiliary switch
20
14 13 1
3.2 3.1
D2
D2
0
Relative switch
Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
30
1
2.4 2.3
0
Relative switch States and positions of circuit breaker/
30
switch-disconnector lever
1
2.2 2.1 Lever position of
0 States of circuit
Early switch
circuit breaker/
breaker/switch-disconnector /switch-discon-
1
20 nector
10.Y2 10.Y 1 0 Switched on
10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch
1
20 Switched off by releases, TEST or by
10.Y2 10.Y 1
10.Y4 10.Y 3 switch off button on the motor drive
0
1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
50
t [ms ]
E64
Specifications

Undervoltage release
1
SP
0
>50
1
OK
OK
0
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and undervoltage release

HK 1
0
50
1
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 700
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)

HK Main contacts
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off IMP ON Make impulse for the motor drive
(loaded state) SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
E65
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
The hand drive permits control the circuit breaker/switch-
disconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines
on and off. Modular conception of the drives enables simple
mounting on the switching unit (also additionally) after
the cover of cavities is removed. The fixed drive can be
sealed. The drive and its accessories are ordered separately
according to your choice, see page E12.
RP-BD-CK10 + RP-BHD-CP20
Hand drive unit RP-BD-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..

Hand drive unit RP-BD-CK.. Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS, see page E29
+ Extension shaft RP-BHD-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BHD-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BHD-CP..
The hand drive unit is fixed directly to switching unit of the

circuit breaker
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door
and it provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
Hand drive lever is fixed on the hand drive unit or on the
hand drive bearing.
The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard
RP-BD-CK21 + RP-BHD-CH10 + RP-BHD-CN41 + RP-BHD-CP21
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (ad-
justable length 252 ÷ 416 mm).
Enhanced safety for operator:

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also sup- Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS, see page E29
plied with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in po-
sition „switched off manually“. The unit and lever of the By a screwdriver it is possible to unlock the mechanism block-
hand drive can be locked using three padlocks with shank ing the switchboard door opening with the circuit breaker
diameter max. 6 mm. switched on (for bearing RP-BHD-CN40 and RP-BHD-CN41).
Each hand drive bearing prevents the door from opening
when the circuit breaker is switched on or in a state of be-
ing switched off by releases and in the circuit breaker state
„switched off manually“ and hand drive lever is locked up.
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be fitted also with
reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical parallel
switching, see page E67.
Specification
Type Description Colour Locking while the circuit Degree of Switched on „switched off manually” and locked Switchboard door opening with Length [mm]
RP-BD-CK10 Hand drive unit blue no - - - - -
RP-BD-CK20 Hand drive unit blue yes - - - - -
RP-BD-CK21 Hand drive unit yellow yes - - - - -
RP-BD-CK30 Hand drive unit - right side blue - - - - - -
RP-BD-CK31 Hand drive unit - left side blue - - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP10 Hand drive lever black no - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP20 Hand drive lever black yes - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP21 Hand drive lever red yes - - - - -
RP-BHD-CN40 Hand drive bearing black - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BHD-CN41 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BHD-CN60 Hand drive bearing black - IP66 yes yes no -
RP-BHD-CN61 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP66 yes yes no -
RP-BHD-CH10 Extension shaft - - - - - - 365 (can be
shortened)
RP-BHD-CH20 Extension shaft - telescopic - - - - - - 252 ÷ 416
E66
RP-BHD-CB10 Mechanical interlocking
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit L

RP-BHD-CB10 can be used between two BD250 circuit breakers or between
BD250 and BH630 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must X
be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand
drive unit and hand drive lever), see page E66.
In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to
comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure and
given in the table.
Right switching unit
BD250..3.. BD250..4.. BH630..3.. BH630..4..
Dimension [mm] X L X L X L X L
Left switching unit
BD250..3.. 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5

BD250..4.. 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5
BH630..3.. 122.5 128.5 157.5 162.5 140 145.5 185 189
BH630..4.. 122.5 128.5 157.5 162.5 140 145.5 185 189
RP-BHD-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Enables for simultaneous switching of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used
between two BD250 circuit breakers or between BD250
and BH630 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be
RP-BHD-CD10 equipped with a hand drive unit and with a hand drive lever,
see page E66. X
In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely necessary
to comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure
and given in the table. Cannot be used in combination with
extension shaft (RP-BHD-CH10 and RP-BHD-CH20).

BD250..3.. BD250..4.. BH630..3.. BH630..4.. 1)
min max min max min max min
Dimension [mm] X X X X X X X Xmax
Left switching unit
BD250..3.. 105+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 x x

BD250..4.. 105+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 x x
BH630..3.. 122.5+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 x x
BH630..4.. 122.5+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 x x
1)
Switching unit BH630..4.. (4-pole design) can only be on the left side
E67
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING 3P 4P
Mechanical interlocking
MB-BD-PV05
MB-BHD-PV03
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/ BD250 BD250
Type of circuit breakers
/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped BD250 BH630
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both cir- Type of mechanical interlocking MB-BD-PV05 MB-BHD-PV03
MB-BD-PV05 cuit breakers may be switched off simultaneously.
Mechanical interlocking MB-BD-PV05 is intended for two
BD250 circuit breakers. Interlocking MB-BHD-PV03 is in-
tended for one BD250 circuit breaker and one BH630.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Circuit breaker placement in switchboard

Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,
which you may download from our website www.oez.com.
Recommended circuit breaker manipulation Recommended process of manipulation

During the manipulation with circuit breaker with mechani- 1) Shunt trip/undervoltage release must be used to switch
cal interlocking and motor drive, the circuit breaker may off the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker switching off can-
reach the state, in which the first attempt at switching on not be made by motor drive
by motor drive is unsuccessful. Switching on is executed af- 2) Circuit breaker can be stored and switched on only if
ter repeated make impulse. To avoid this effect, some of the the second circuit breaker is in switch-off mode. Circuit
following steps may be done: breaker status indicator on motor drive is in „O“ position.
Between storing and switching on the circuit breaker,
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit breaker, it is necessary to keep the time interval min. 100 ms.
see „Recommended circuit breaker manipulation“ below Switch „S“ must be disconnected.
2) To connect OD-BHD-R… control relay into the motor 3) In case of infringement of these principles, the first
drive circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E74 switching on of circuit breaker is unsuccessful.
109
0
=4
Rmin
0 ÷ 700
45
30 min. 80
E68
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch - automatic accumulation of energy is switched off (S
OFF/ON). switch open): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the
Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push
breaker cover of cavities is removed. button or by the switch off button on the motor drive
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand both motor drive and circuit breaker stay in position
by units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric „ switched off by releases“. In this position motor drive
devices is needed. waits for the impulse from switch S. When the impulse is
In order to speed up the circuit breaker’s switch off (e.g. brought in the motor drive accumulates energy (turn on
MP-BD-X230 safety STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt trip the circuit breaker) and after this loading the motor drive
can be used. is ready to switch on the circuit breaker. It is not possible
On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over to switch on the circuit breaker when motor drive is not
switch to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL: loaded.
- AUTO mode – remote control. The circuit breaker is con- Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy
trolled by buttons for remote switch off/on, further- signals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state
more in this position mechanical control can be used can be signalled from a distance.
on the front panel of the motor drive The drive may be furnished with an electromechanical
- MANUAL mode – manual control. Control voltage is not counter of cycles.
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using - internal design on the motor drive cover
the green switch on button and switched off using - external design OD-BHD-PP01 for mounting on the switch-
the red switch off button on the front part of the drive board’s door or inside the switchboard by means of metal
cover. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off is holder, that is part of the delivery
functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by Motor drive can be sealed by means of bolt sealing insert
means of hinged lever. (OD-BD-VP01).
Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/MANUAL Drive can be locked in off position by up to three padlocks
switch. (shank diameter max. 4.3 mm).
Switch S (external switch – has to be bought separately) Switch on button can be covered and sealed (OD-BHD-KT01).
enables the choice of automatic accumulation of energy (circuit Drive is connected by multi-pole connector with cavities
breaker loading). (in order to connect cables special tongs have to be used).
- automatic accumulation of energy is on (S switch Drive can be furnished with cable (OD-BHD-KA02), that
DIMENSIONS, see page E30 switched on): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the has on one side connector to the motor drive and on the
overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push other side free terminals for connection to etc. switchboard’s
button or by the switch off button on the motor drive terminal block.
motor drive immediately accumulates energy (circuit
breaker loading), motor drive is then ready to switch on
the circuit breaker
Specifications
Type MP-BD-X…, MP-BD-X…-P
Operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Rated frequency fn 50 / 60 Hz
Control impulse length for storage 400 ms ÷ ∞ 1)
Control impulse length for switching on 20 ms ÷ 700 ms 1)
for switching off 400 ms ÷ ∞ 1)
Time to switching on < 50 ms
OD-BHD-KT01 Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 3 cycles/min
DC 100 W
Protection AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V LTN-4C-1; LTN-2C-1
DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V LTN-UC-4C-1; LTN-UC-2C-1
Rated operating current of the change-over Ie / Ue 5 A / AC 250 V
switch AUTO/MANUAL 0.5 A / DC 250 V
Type OD-BHD-KA02
OD-BHD-KA02
Conductor cross-section S 0.35 mm2
1)
for sequence of control impulses, see page E72
E69
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive - electrically by ON push button Circuit breaker switching off by motor drive - electrically by OFF push button
2 1 50 2 1 800
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 0 6 5 0
Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch
50 800
3.4 3.3 1 3.4 3.3 1
3.4 3.3 0 3.4 3.3 0
40 800
14 13 1 14 13 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
Relative switch Relative switch
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
Early switch Early switch
20 900
1 1
10.Y2 10.Y 1 0 10.Y2 10.Y 1 0
10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch 10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y 1 1 10.Y2 10.Y 1 1
10.Y4 10.Y 3 0 10.Y4 10.Y 3 0
1 5 1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
10
50
0
00
00
10
50
10
50
50
50
t [ms ] t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive - electrically by ON and OFF push button States and positions of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever
Lever position of circuit
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
breaker/switch-disconnector
Q3
L+
Switched on
ON
S button on the motor drive
OF F
B Switched off manually or by motor drive
Motorový pohon
Motor drive
Wiring diagram description

X3
9 7 3 4 1 5 Symbol Description
MP motor drive MP-BD-X...
M motor
P storage device
NC NO
S5
C
M P S5*) switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
YC external counter of cycles OD-BHD-PP01
B recommended wiring of the control circuits
MP
(not included in motor drive order)
8 6 2 2 1 ON switch off button
X3 X4
S switch for energy storage
PE N- (switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on)
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page E68
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles
E70
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by overcurrent release Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by shunt trip or
(S switch in switched on state-automatic storage) undervoltage release (switch s in switched on state-automatic storage)
2 1 20 2 1 20
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
20 20
3.4 3.3 1 3.4 3.3 1
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3
0 0
20 20
14 13 1 14 13 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
30 520 30 520
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
30 520 30 520
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
Signal switch
30 520
1 1
1.2 1.1
0 0
Signal switch
30 520
1 1
1.4 1.3
0 0
1 5 1 5
10 3
10 3
4
4
10 2
10 2
10
10
50
50
0
0
00
00
10
10
50
50
50
50
t [ms ] t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push button) Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON
and tripping by shunt trip push button) and tripping by undervoltage release
Ovládací
Control obvod
circuit of motor drive Ovládací
Control circuit ofobvod
motor drive
Q3 Q3
L+ L+
ON ON
S S
OF F OF F
B B
Motorový pohon
Motor drive Motorový
Motor drivepohon
D1
D1
C1
C1
9 7 3 4 1 5 9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 X3
SV -BHD-X...
SV -BHD-X...
NC NO NC NO
SP-BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
S5 S5
C C
or or
M P M P
MP MP
8 6 2 2 1 8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
C2
X3 X4 J X3 X4 J
cavity No.
dutina č.1010 cavity No.
dutina 10
č.10
N- N-
PE PE
N- N-
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles
E71
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications

Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and switching
- S switch permanently switched on (automatic storage) or open on by motor drive - S switch permanently switched on (automatic storage)
800 50 50
HK 1 HK 1
0 0
800 > 600 520 > 880
PS 1 RS 1
0 0
>100 > 1 400
> 1 400
400 ÷ ∞ 20 ÷ 1 500 20 ÷ 700
1 1
IMP OFF IMP ON IMP ON
0 0
t [ms ] R OFF t [ms ]
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and

switching on by motor drive - S switch switched on only for storing up Description of graphs
Symbol Description
50
HK main contacts
HK 1 PS auxiliary switch
0
RS relative switch
X+520 > 880
R OFF circuit breaker closing instant by release of circuit breaker
RS 1
IMP S impulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S switch)
0
>100 IMP ON make impulse for the motor drive
X > 1 400
400 ÷ ∞ 20 ÷ 700 IMP OFF break impulse for the motor drive
1
IMP S IMP ON X random segment of time
0
R OFF t [ms ]

Switched on

E72
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breaker

control circuits in withdrawable/plug-in design with motor drive
- connecting with control relays
- operating voltage Ue AC/DC 24 V, AC/DC 48 V, AC 110 ÷ 230 V, DC 110 V
Switching off by motor drive
Q3
L+
S
Diagram description
OFF ON Symbol Description
MP motor drive - Ue of drive must be the same as Ue of control relay
M motor
P storage device
3.PS-BHD-1000
X3
9 7 3 4 1 5 T 1 A1 K1 1.PS-BHD-0100
OD-BHD-R... 3.3 1.1
3.4 1.2
NC NO
3 4 A2 K2 S switch for energy storage
S5
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker for AC 24 V LTN-4C-1
C for AC 48 V LTN-4C-1
M P for AC 110 V LTN-4C-1
for AC 230 V LTN-2C-1
for DC 24 V LTN-UC-4C-1
MP
OD-BHD-R… control relay for for AC/DC 24 V
8 6 2 2 1 for AC/DC 48 V
X3 X4
for AC 110 ÷ 230 V
YC for DC 110 V
PE N-
3.PS-BHD-1000 auxiliary switch
1.PS-BHD-0100 signal switch
- impulse on T terminal reacts to trailing edge
E73
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breakers control circuits

with mechanical interlocking and motor drive (applicable for any circuit breaker)
Switching off is possible only by undervoltage release or shunt trip
Q3
L+
OFF OFF ON
9 7 3 4 1 5 T 1 A1 K1
13.PS-BHD-1000
23.PS-BHD-1000
X3
1.PS-BHD-0100
OD-BHD-R... 3.3 1.1 3.3
SP-BHD-X...
3.4 1.2 3.4

SV-BHD-X...
NC NO
3 4 A2 K2
S5
C1
D1
M P
D2
C2
MP
8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4
YC
PE N-
Diagram description
Symbol Description
M motor
P storage device
for AC 110 V LTN-4C-
for DC 24 V LTN-UC-4C-
OD-BHD-R… control relay for AC/DC 24 V
for AC/DC 48 V
for AC 110 ÷ 230 V
for DC 110 V
13.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (first circuit breaker) - auxiliary switch
23.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (second circuit breaker) - auxiliary switch
SP-BHD-X... undervoltage release - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
SV-BHD-X... shunt trip - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
E74
Modeion
FMOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BH630N, BH630S
F
Modeion BH630N, BH630S
Switching units, plug-in device, withdrawable device ........................................................................................F4
Overcurrent releases, switch-disconnector unit ......................................................................................................F6
Residual current monitor ......................................................................................................................................................F7
Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................F7
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................F8
Mounting sets ............................................................................................................................................................................F10
Switches ........................................................................................................................................................................................F11
Shunt trips ...................................................................................................................................................................................F11
Undervoltage releases ..........................................................................................................................................................F11
Delay unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................F11
Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................F12
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................F12
Motor drives ................................................................................................................................................................................F12
Control relay ...............................................................................................................................................................................F12
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................................F14
- specifications........................................................................................................................................F15
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................F16
- connecting, mounting .........................................................................................................................F18
- deionization spaces .............................................................................................................................F22
- dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................F24
Plug-in device - description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................F48
Withdrawable device - description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................F50
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications .................................................................................................................F52
MTV8 - motor
L001 - lines
MTV9 - motor with adjustable timing selectivity
4D01 - distribution with N-pole protection
Connecting sets - specifications.......................................................................................................................................F19
Switches - specifications, diagram........................................................................................................................F59
Shunt trips - specifications.......................................................................................................................................F60
- specifications.......................................................................................................................................F62
Hand drives - description, specifications....................................................................................................................F64

- description, specifications, dimensions................................................................................................F65
Motor drives - description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................F67
F2
BH630N, BH630S Commercial information Modeion
PROPERTIES OF BH630 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Easy connection
or via cable lugs.
circuit breakers.

Local control
as the main switch.
Plug-in and withdrawable design

In the case of the withdrawable design, a secure visible disconnection of the main circuit.
F3
Modeion BH630N, BH630S Commercial information
SWITCHING UNITS 3P
BH630NE305 OEZ:14412 630 36 5.3 1
BH630SE305 OEZ:14413 630 65 5.3 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F15
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page F18 as well as deionization space, see page F22
- Switching unit: includes - 2 CS-BH-A011 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)
- insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS01 (4x M5x35)
- conductor holder OD-BH-DV01
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BH-....-.... (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BH-0630-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BH630NE305
1)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F8
PLUG-IN DEVICE 3P

ZO-BH-0630-300 OEZ:14556 Plug-in device 2.61 1
- Plug-in device: includes - complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in plug-in design
- mounting bolts set (4x M5x45) for affixing switching unit to plug-in device
must be fitted with - switching unit BH630..305
ZO-BH-0630-300
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BH-A011 can be used, that are included in
the package of the BH630..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting
sets, see page F8

ZV-BH-0630-300 OEZ:14553 Withdrawable device 3.664 1

must be fitted with - switching unit BH630..305
ZV-BH-0630-300
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BH-A011 can be used, that are included
in the package of the BH630..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH ... connecting
sets, see page F8
F4
SWITCHING UNITS 4P
BH630NE405 OEZ:19583 630 36 3P + N - conductor switching 6.65 1
BH630SE405 OEZ:19585 630 65 3P + N - conductor switching 6.65 1
BH630NE406 OEZ:19584 630 36 4P - conductor protection 7 1
BH630SE406 OEZ:19586 630 65 4P - conductor protection 7 1
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page F18 as well as deionization space, see page F22
- Switching unit: includes - 2 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)
- insulating barriers
- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS01 (4x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BH-DV01
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BH-....-.... (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BH-0630-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BH630NE405
1)
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F8
PLUG-IN DEVICE 4P

ZO-BH-0630-400 OEZ:20649 Plug-in device 3.4 1
- Plug-in device: includes - complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in plug-in design
must be fitted with - switching unit BH630..405 or BH630..406
ZO-BH-0630-400
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used, that are included in the package
of the BH630..40... switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F8

ZV-BH-0630-400 OEZ:20650 Withdrawable device 4.5 1

must be fitted with - switching unit BH630..405 or BH630..406
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used that are included with the
ZV-BH-0630-400 BH630..40... switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F8
F5
250 SE-BH-0250-DTV3 OEZ:25300 IR setting = 100 ÷ 250 A 0.345 1
SE-BH-0630-DTV3

possibility of protection lines and transformers
250 SE-BH-0250-MTV8 OEZ:25310 IR setting = 100 ÷ 250 A 0.345 1
SE-BH-0630-MTV8
L001 - characteristic L - lines

without IR setting
250 SE-BH-0250-L001 OEZ:20614 Without IR setting 0.345 1
SE-BH-0630-L001 400 SE-BH-0400-L001 OEZ:20616 Without IR setting 0.345 1
MTV9 - characteristic M - motor with adjustable timing selectivity

enables setting delay of independent release to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
SE-BH-0630-MTV9 630 SE-BH-0630-MTV9 OEZ:19568 IR setting = 250 ÷ 630 A 0.345 1
4D01 - characteristic D - distribution with N-pole protection
protection lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
250 SE-BH-0250-4D01 OEZ:33426 IR setting = 100 ÷ 250 A 0.355 1
SE-BH-0630-4D01
- intended for BH630..406 switching unit
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR UNIT 3P 4P

630 SE-BH-0630-V001 OEZ:25120 Switch-disconnector unit 0.295 1
SE-BH-0630-V001
F6

5SV8000-6KK

5SV8001-6KK


5SV8706-0KK

5SV8 900-1KK OEZ:42668 Holder on “U“ rail according to EN 60715 wide 35 mm, for current 0.01 2
transformers with internal diameter up to and including 105 mm
5SV89000-1KK
F7
3 terminals
CS-BH-T011 OEZ:24820 Clamp terminals 35 ÷ 240 Cu cables, flexibars 0.433 1
CS-BH-T011
CS-BH-B011 OEZ:24761 Block terminals 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al cables 0.279 1

CS-BH-B012 OEZ:24762 Block terminals 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al cables 0.302 1
CS-BH-B011 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F19
CS-BH-B021 OEZ:24781 Double block terminals 2x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al cables 0.721 1
CS-BH-B022 OEZ:15816 Double block terminals 2x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al cables 0.750 1
CS-BH-B021 - using the OD-BH-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
CS-BH-B031 OEZ:36604 Block terminals 3x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al cables 0.9 1

- using the OD-BH-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
- conductor cross-section for potential terminal is 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2
CS-BH-B031
CS-BH-A021 OEZ:24780 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.567 1

CS-BH-A021

- for 6 cables
- using the OD-BH-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
CS-BH-B014
CS-BH-A011 OEZ:24760 Front connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.186 1

flexibars
CS-BH-A011 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F19
- included in every supply of switching units
CS-BH-PS01 OEZ:13683 Potential terminals 1.5 ÷ 2.5; 4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor 0.021 1

CS-BH-PS01
1 terminal
Type Order code Description S [mm2] Method of connection Weight [kg] Package [set]
CS-BH-T411 OEZ:19589 Clamp terminal 35 ÷ 240 Cu cables, flexibars 0.148 1
CS-BH-T411
CS-BH-B411 OEZ:19593 Block terminal 150 ÷ 240 Cu/Al cables 0.093 1

CS-BH-B412 OEZ:19588 Block terminal 25 ÷ 150 Cu/Al cables 0.101 1
CS-BH-B411 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F19
CS-BH-B421 OEZ:19590 Double block terminal 2x (150÷240) Cu/Al cables 0.24 1

CS-BH-B422 OEZ:19591 Double block terminal 2x (25÷150) Cu/Al cables 0.25 1
CS-BH-B421
1)
F8
CONNECTING SETS 3P
1 terminal
CS-BH-B432 OEZ:42692 Block terminals 3 x (25 ÷ 150) Cu/Al cables 0.3 1
CS-BH-B431
CS-BH-B414 OEZ:21169 Block terminal 6x (6 ÷ 35) Cu/Al cables 0.1 1

- for 6 cables
CS-BH-B414
CS-BH-A421 OEZ:19592 Rear connection Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.189 1

CS-BH-A421
CS-BH-PS41 OEZ:36032 Potential terminal 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 0.005 1

CS-BH-PS41
3 terminals
CS-BH-A037 OEZ:24783 Reduction for BA...*37-50 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.47 1
CS-BH-A037
CS-BH-A039 OEZ:24782 Reduction for BA...*39-50 and Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, 0.628 1
J2UX50 - front connection flexibars
- for total replacement of BA …*39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection OD-BHD-MS39 connecting set is necessary
CS-BH-A039
CS-BH-Z039 OEZ:18202 Reduction for BA...*39 a J2UX Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs 0.954 1
- rear connection
- for total replacement of BA…*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection OD-BH-MZ39 and CS-BH-A021 connecting sets are necessary
CS-BH-Z039
CS-BH-JX75 OEZ:14562 Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 Cu/Al busbars, 1.924 1
- front connection, withdrawable design flexibars, cable lugs
- for total replacement of BA…*39-75 or J2UX75T circuit breakers with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting
set and ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BH-JX75
CS-BH-JT75 OEZ:14561 Reduction for J2UX75T - front Cu/Al busbars, 2.64 1

connection, withdrawable design flexibars, cable lugs
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set and
ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BH-JT75
F9
MOUNTING SETS 3P

OD-BHD-MS39 OEZ:24741 Reduction for BA...*39-50 and J2UX50 - front connection 0.7 1
- DIMENSIONS see page F27
- for total replacement of BA …*39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection 2 connecting sets CS-BH-A039 are necessary
OD-BHD-MS39
OD-BH-MZ39 OEZ:18204 Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX - rear connection 1.195 1
- for total replacement of BA…*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection also 2 connecting sets CS-BH-Z039 and CS-BH A021
are necessary
OD-BH-MZ39
OD-BH-MT75 OEZ:33331 Reduction for J2UX75T - front connection, withdrawable design 1

- DIMENSIONS see page F33, F37
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 connecting sets CS-BH-JT75
and ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-BH-MT75
OD-BHD-MS75 OEZ:14563 Reduction for BA...*39-75 a J2UX75 - front connection, 0.446 1

withdrawable design
- DIMENSIONS see page F33, F37
- for total replacement of BA...*39-75 or J2UX75 circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 connecting sets CS-BH-JT75
and ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-BHD-MS75
1)
one set provides for replacing one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
F10
AUXILIARY SWITCHES 3P 4P
Single make contacts
PS-BHD-1000 OEZ:24700 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.012 1
PS-BHD-1000 Single break contacts

PS-BHD-0100 OEZ:24701 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.013 1
Double
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0200 OEZ:13690 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.026 1
PS-BHD-1100 OEZ:13691 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.025 1
PS-BHD-1100 PS-BHD-2000 OEZ:13689 AC/DC 60 ÷ 500 V 0.024 1
Make-and-break
PS-BHD-0010 OEZ:18021 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.013 1
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0020 OEZ:35893 AC/DC 60 ÷ 250 V 0.026 1
Early
SP-BHD-0002 OEZ:16169 Early switch 0.045 1
SP-BHD-0002
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION for all switch, see page F59
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P

SV-BHD-X024 OEZ:24650 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X110 OEZ:24630 AC/DC 110 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X230 OEZ:24620 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V 0.14 1
SV-BHD-X230
SP-BHD-X024 OEZ:24450 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X110 OEZ:24430 AC/DC 110 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X230 OEZ:24420 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V 0.11 1
SP-BHD-X024-00011) OEZ:24550 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V - with early contact 0.12 1
SP-BHD-X230
SP-BHD-X110-00011) OEZ:24530 AC/DC 110 V - with early contact 0.12 1
1)
SP-BHD-X230-0001 OEZ:24520 AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V - with early contact 0.12 1
1)
cannot be used in combination with motor drive MP-BH-X...
DELAY UNIT
BZ-BX-X230-A OEZ:36696 Enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping 0.12 1
of circuit breakers Modeion
BZ-BX-X230-A
F11
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P

RP-BH-CK10 OEZ:13653 Hand drive unit - without locking 0.223 1
RP-BH-CK20 OEZ:13654 Hand drive unit - with locking 0.223 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on circuit breaker - with the black hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP10 or RP-BHD-CP20
RP-BH-CK10 - with the hand drive bearing RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BH-CK21 OEZ:13685 Hand drive unit - yellow label - with locking 0.223 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on circuit breaker - with the red hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP21
- with the hand drive bearing RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BH-CK21
RP-BH-CK30 OEZ:37252 Hand drive unit for right side control 0.512 1
RP-BH-CK31 OEZ:37253 Hand drive unit for left side control 0.512 1
RP-BH-CK30
RP-BHD-CP10 OEZ:13655 Hand drive lever - black - without locking 0.075 1

RP-BHD-CP20 OEZ:13656 Hand drive lever - black - with locking 0.075 1
RP-BHD-CP10
RP-BHD-CP21 OEZ:13657 Hand drive lever - red - with locking 0.075 1

RP-BHD-CP21
RP-BHD-CN40 OEZ:37246 Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP40 0.14 1

RP-BHD-CN40
RP-BHD-CN41 OEZ:37247 Hand drive bearing - yellow label - degree of protection IP40 0.14 1
RP-BHD-CN41
RP-BHD-CN60 OEZ:37248 Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP66 0.14 1

RP-BHD-CN60
RP-BHD-CN61 OEZ:37249 Hand drive bearing - yellow label - degree of protection IP66 0.14 1
RP-BHD-CN61
F12
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P

RP-BHD-CH10 OEZ:13658 Extension shaft - length 365 mm, can be shortened 0.205 1
RP-BHD-CH10
RP-BHD-CH20 OEZ:13659 Extension shaft - telescopic, length 252 ÷ 416 mm 0.255 1

RP-BHD-CH20

RP-BHD-CB10 OEZ:18290 Mechanical interlocking - for fixed design 0.16 1
RP-BHD-CB10 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F65
- mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BH-CK..
2 hand drive levers RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CD10 OEZ:18289 Mechanical parallel switching - for fixed design 0.23 1

RP-BHD-CD10 - mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BH-CK..
with the hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
MB-BH-PV04 OEZ:19611 Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable - for two circuit 0.448 1
breakers BH630
MB-BHD-PV03 OEZ:19613 Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable - for one BD250 and 0.448 1
one BH630 circuit breaker
MB-BH-PV04
- mechanical blocking with Bowden cable is intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
MP-BH-X0241) OEZ:20590 Motor drive AC/DC 24 V 1.691 1
MP-BH-X0481) OEZ:19792 Motor drive AC/DC 48 V 1.691 1
MP-BH-X110 OEZ:13539 Motor drive AC/DC 110 V 1.691 1
MP-BH-X230 OEZ:13536 Motor drive AC 230 V/ DC 220 V 1.691 1
MP-BH-X024-P1) OEZ:20591 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC/DC 24 V 1.708 1
MP-BH-X230
MP-BH-X230-P1) OEZ:13540 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC 230 V/ DC 220 V 1.708 1
- motor drive cannot be used in combination with SP-BHD-X...-0001
1)
custom production
OD-BHD-PP01 OD-BHD-PP01 OEZ:13688 Counter of cycles - cable length 1.1 m 0.08 1
OD-BHD-KA02 OEZ:13809 Extension cable - to motor drive, 12 wires, length 0.6 m 0.1 1
OD-BHD-KA02
CONTROL RELAY
Type Order code Specifications Weight [kg] Package [pc]
OD-BHD-RA03 OEZ:37427 AC 110 ÷ 230 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RD04 OEZ:37428 DC 110 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RA03
F13
ACCESSORIES 3P 4P

OD-BHD-KS02 OEZ:24740 Insulating barriers - set (two pieces), for 3P and 4P design 0.077 1
OD-BHD-KS42 OEZ:19575 Insulating barrier - one piece, for 4P design 0.039 1
- included with each switching unit order
- in case circuit breaker/switch-disconnector connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary in most cases to install
OD-BHD-KS02 these barriers also on the lower side
- for more detailed information see page F22
OD-BH-KS03 OEZ:13531 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 3P design 0.144 1
OD-BH-KS43 OEZ:19587 Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 4P design 0.209 1
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using B021, B022, B031, B032 a B014 block type terminals
- intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
OD-BH-KS03
OD-BH-UP01 OEZ:13532 Lever with locking 0.013 1

- enables to lock the circuit breaker in „switched off manually“ position (loaded)
OD-BH-UP01
OD-BH-VP01 OEZ:15330 Bolt sealing insert 0.001 2

- enables sealing for: - cover of cavities
- terminal cover
- overcurrent release
- hand drive unit
OD-BH-VP01 - motor drive
OD-BH-VP02 OEZ:18216 Additional cover for overcurrent release 0.1 1

- enables sealing for overcurrent releases such as circuit breakers in the main meter switchboard
OD-BH-VP02
OD-BHD-KA01 OEZ:14555 Connecting cable - to connect the circuit breaker/ 0.12 1

/switch-disconnector accessories in the plug-in/
/withdrawable design - 15 wires
OD-BHD-KA01 (it is possible for plug-in design and fixed design)
SO-BHD-0010 OEZ:14560 Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker position 0.018 1

in the plug-in or withdrawable device
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F48, F50
SO-BHD-0010
OD-BH-KK01 OEZ:14554 Keying set - prevents inserting in the plug-in 0.005 1

or withdrawable devices beyond the switching unit
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F48, F50
OD-BH-KK01
OD-BHD-KT01 OEZ:14642 Cover of switch on button - for motor drive, cover can 0.002 1
be sealed
OD-BHD-KT01
F14
BH630N, BH630S Technical information Modeion

Type BH630N, BH630S
Weight (3P/4P design) 5.4/7.4 kg 5.4 kg
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Rated current In 250, 315, 400, 500, 630 A -
Rated normal current Iu 630 A 630 A
- max. DC 440 V
Circuit breaker Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 8 kV 8 kV
DC 440 V - DC-23B
Rated short-time withstand current at Ue = AC 690 V Icw / t 8 kA / 50 ms, 7 kA / 300 ms, 7.5 kA / 5 s
6.5 kA / 1 s
Series NORMAL SUPERIOR
Ue -
BH630N BH630S
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (rms) 1) Icu 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V
36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
-
20 kA 35 kA AC 500 V
15 kA 20 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms) Ics 40 kA 75 kA AC 230 V
18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
-
10 kA 20 kA AC 500 V
8 kA 15 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm / Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 14 kA / AC 415 V
- - 14 kA / DC 440 V
Application in IT network Ue AC 690 V 2) -
Switch-disconnector Losses per 1 pole fixed/withdrawable design 75 W/85 W 75 W/85 W
Dimensions Ambient temperature range -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C
Installation positions - fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design Plug-in design 3P/4P z/z z/z
Withdrawable design 3P/4P z/z z/z
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/z/z/z z/z/z/z
Shunt trip z z
Undervoltage release/with early switch z/z z/z

LOAD Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for overcurrent release z/z z/z
in case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change
2)
deionization spaces for application in IT networks, see page R6
F15
Modeion BH630N, BH630S Technical information
Diagram

Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
2 4 1 1 3 5
S
ZO-BH
OF F SO 1
B
ZV -BH
Motorový pohon
releases spínač
/ Early switch Mainobvod
Hlavní circuit
D1
10 .Y 1
D1
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
C1
1 3 5
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 SE-BH
A
SP-BHD-X...-0001
SP-BHD-0002
NO
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
NC NC NO
S6 S5
C C Q
or or or
V
M P B
T1
TEST T2
MP T3
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 4
11 8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6
dutinaNo.
cavity
dutina č. 10
10
č.10
PE N- ZO-BH
SO 2 SO 3
ZV -BH
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízení
Diagram description (3P and 4P design)

Propojovacícable
Connecting kabel MP motor drive - MP-BH-X...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 M motor
P storage device
X2
S5 switch to indicate AUTO AUTO (NO-C)/
Spínače
Switches /MANUAL (NC-C)
návěstní
signal relativní
relative pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary S6 switch to indicate full storage
(ready to switch on: NO-C)
1. 1
2. 1
1. 2
1. 4
3. 1
1. 3
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
2. 3
3. 3
2. 3
3. 3
5. 1
2. 2
3. 2
2. 4
3. 4
4. 2
5. 2
4. 4
5. 4
5. 3
4. 1
4. 3
2.2
3.2
2.4
3.4
YC external counter of cycles - OD-BHD-PP01

A
- it is not a part of motor drive
ON switch on button
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100

or or S switch for energy storage (switched on
= automatic storage, switch may be
continuously switched on)
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page F67
J switching unit - BH630..
B Q main contacts
T1, T2, T3, T41) current transformers
PS - BH D--0 010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0020
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
or or or or or or or or or or or
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
SE-BH circuit breaker - overcurrent release -

SE-BH-....-....
switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector
unit - SE-BH-0630-V001
2. 1
4. 1
2. 2
2. 2
3. 1
4. 2
3. 4
5. 2
2. 4
4. 4
5. 1
2. 2
5. 4
2.1
3.1
1. 2
3. 4
2. 4
3. 2
1. 1
1. 4
3. 2
3. 4
ZO-BH plug-in device - ZO-BH-0630-....

cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.111 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.222 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.333 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č. 44
č.4 cavity
dutina
dutinaNo.
č.
č.555 cavity
dutinaNo.
dutinač.č.22
2++
+333 ZV-BH withdrawable device - ZV-BH-0630-....
X1, X2 connecting cable - OD-BHD-KA01
SO1, SO2, SO3 contacts signalling circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector position in plug-in
X1 or withdrawable device SO-BHD-0010 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
for more detailed information see page
Propojovací cable
Connecting kabel
F48, F50
SP-BHD-X... undervoltage release
SV-BHD-X... shunt trip
SP-BHD-X...-0001 undervoltage release with early contact
SP-BHD-0002 early contact
1)
only for 4-pole design of BH630..406 switching unit
F16
Diagram

Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízení device
2 4 1 N 1 3 5
S
ZO-BH
OF F SO 1
B
ZV -BH
Motorový pohon
releases spínač
/ Early switch Hlavní
Mainobvod
circuit
D1
10 .Y 1
D1
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
C1
N 1 3 5
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 SE-BH
A
SP-BHD-X...-0001
SP-BHD-0002
NO
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
NC NC NO
S6 S5
C C Q
or or or
V
M P B
T1
TEST T2
MP T3
1)
T4
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 4
11 8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
X3 X4 J N 2 4 6
cavity
dutinaNo. 10
č.10
PE N- ZO-BH
SO 2 SO 3
ZV -BH
1 4 2 1 4 2 N 2 4 6
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles Odnímatelné / Výsuvné zařízenídevice
Propojovací
Connectingkabel
cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Spínače
Switches
návěstní
signal relativní
relative pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary
1. 1
2. 1
1. 2
1. 4
3. 1
7. 1
8. 1
9. 1
1. 3
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
6. 1
2. 3
6. 3
3. 3
7. 3
8. 3
9. 3
2. 3
3. 3
5. 1
2. 2
3. 2
6. 2
7. 2
8. 2
9. 2
2. 4
3. 4
4. 2
5. 2
6. 4
7. 4
8. 4
9. 4
4. 4
5. 4
5. 3
4. 1
4. 3
2.2
3.2
2.4
3.4
A
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
or or
B
PS - BH D--0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0020
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
2. 1
6. 1
4. 1
2. 2
2. 2
6. 2
3. 1
7. 1
8. 1
9. 1
4. 2
3. 4
5. 2
2. 4
4. 4
5. 1
2. 2
2.1
3.1
5. 4
1. 2
3. 4
7. 4
8. 4
9. 4
2. 4
3. 2
6. 4
1. 1
1. 4
3. 2
7. 2
8. 2
9. 2
3. 4
cavity
dutinaNo.
č.11 cavity
dutinaNo.
č. 22 cavity
dutinaNo.
č. 33 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.44 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.55 cavity
dutinaNo.
č. 22++33 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.66 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.77 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.88 cavity No.
dutina č. 9 9
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Propojovací
Connectingkabel
cable
F17

Power circuit Recommended min. cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables IR (In) [A] Cables S [mm2] Busbars W x H [mm]
with cable lugs Cu Al Cu Al
connection sets are produced to provide greater connecting 100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2
options, see page F7 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
generally, conductors from the supply are connected to 160 70 95 25 x 3 32 x 3

input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to 200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N); however, it is possible to reverse the
250 120 150 25 x 5 32 x 5
connection (exchanging input and output terminals without
limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu) 315 150 185 32 x 5 32 x 6
400 185 240 32 x 6 32 x 8
in case of reversed connection, in the majority of
cases, circuit breaker/switch-disconnector must be fit- 500 2x 120 2x 185 32 x 8 32 x 12
ted with OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers also on the 630 2x 185 1) 2x 240 2) 32 x 12 3) 32 x 16 2)
side of terminals 2, 4, 6, for more detailed information
- it is necessary to follow the relevant valid standards when cables are designed
see page F22 1)
connection of withdrawable and plug-in design by 2x 240 mm2 Cu
2)
withdrawable and plug-in design can not be connected by Al
we recommend painting the connecting busbars 3)
connection of withdrawable and plug-in design by min. 32 x 16 Cu
input and output conductors/busbars must be me-

chanically reinforced in order to avoid transferring Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature
electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker/switch- Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BH630 - connection by cu cable 2x 185 mm2 per pole
disconnector during short-circuiting 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
the method of connecting the power circuit must 630 A 620 A 580 A 540 A 500 A
observe the deionization space of the circuit breaker
see page F23 Mechanical reinforcement
of conductors for BH630
Auxiliary circuits
switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected Ik ≤ 25 kA
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 di-
rectly to terminals on these devices
Ik ≤ 65 kA
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or withdra-
wable design are connected using a connector
F18


lugs W x H [mm] drawing 3P/4P
CS-BH-A011
630 32 x ...
CS-BH-A411
CS-BH-A021
630 32 x ... page F26/F40
CS-BH-A421
CS-BH-T011
400 35 ÷ 240 Cu 35 ÷ 240 Cu 35 ÷ 240 Cu 35 ÷ 240 Cu
CS-BH-T411
CS-BH-B011
CS-BH-B411
CS-BH-B012
CS-BH-B412
CS-BH-B021
630 2x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al 2x (120 ÷ 240) Cu/Al 2x (150 ÷ 240) Cu/Al 2x (120 ÷ 240) Cu/Al page F24/F38
CS-BH-B421
CS-BH-B022
CS-BH-B422
CS-BH-B014
CS-BH-B414
CS-BH-B031
CS-BH-B431
CS-BH-B032
CS-BH-B432
CS-BH-A037 400 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*37 with front connection page F27 page F27
CS-BH-A039 630 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 with front connection page F27 page F27
CS-BH-Z039 630 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…*39 with rear connection page F27 page F27
CS-BH-JX75 630 Reduction for circuit breaker BA…39-75 a J2UX75 with front connection in withdrawable design page F33, F37 page F33, F37
CS-BH-JT75 630 Reduction for circuit breaker J2UX75T with front connection in withdrawable design page F33, F37 page F33, F37
CS-BH-PS01 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor
CS-BH-PS41 10/16 1.5 ÷ 2.5/4 ÷ 6 Cu flexible conductor
11
16
32
CS-BH-A011
32
CS-BH-A021
OD-BHD-KS02
2.
Click ! 3.
6.
BH630...
7. F
BH630...
1.
3.
3.
234
1. 2.
M10
4.
4.
5.
16
6.
8. 5.
20 Nm ... 8
20 Nm ... 8
7.
9.
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
F19
Front connection - Cu cables Front connection - Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-T011 CS-BH-B011
or
CS-BH-B012
OD-BHD-KS0 2 OD-BHD-KS02
BH630...
6. 6.
7. F BH630... 7. F
3.
4.
2.
209
Click !
2.
3.
20 Nm ... 8 mm
Click !
1.
209
25
1. 6.
8. CS-BH-B011
9. 5.
120 ÷ 150 mm 2 Al , Cu ...
25
25 Nm ... 8 mm
35
5. 35 ÷ 70 mm 2 Cu ... 185 ÷ 240 mm 2 Al , Cu ...
O
9.
10.
0.8 Nm 4. 25 Nm ... 6 mm 30 Nm ... 8 mm
0.8 Nm
95 ÷ 240 mm 2 Cu .... CS-BH-B012

35
30 Nm ... 6 mm 16 ÷ 50 mm 2 A l, Cu ...
15 Nm ... 6 mm
70 ÷ 150 mm 2 Al, Cu...
20 Nm ... 6 mm
Front connection - 2 Cu/Al cables Front connection - 6 Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-B021 OD-BHD-KS02
or CS-BH-B014
OD-BHD-KS0 2
CS-BH-B022
M10 1.
or OD-BH-KS03
or OD-BH-KS03 M8 1.
8.
IP20
IP20 F
8. BH630...
F
BH630...
8.
8.
F
F 9. 5.
9. 5. 10. 20 Nm ... 8
10. 20 Nm ... 8
2.
2. Click ! 3.
4.
4. Click ! 3.
326
369
7.
6.
37.5
26
7.
6. 8.
14.5
F
8.
30
F
55
0.8 Nm
11.
0.8 Nm
11
CS-BH-B021
120 ÷ 150 mm 2 Al , Cu ... 25 Nm ... 8 mm
185 ÷ 240 mm 2 Al , Cu ... 30 Nm ... 8 mm
CS-BH-B022
16 ÷ 50 mm 2 A l, Cu ... 15 Nm ... 6 mm
70 ÷ 150 mm 2 Al, Cu... 20 Nm ... 6 mm
F20
Front connection - cable lugs Front connection- BH reduction for circuit breaker BA…37
CS-BH-A011 CS-BH-A037
OD-BHD-KS02
OD-BHD-KS02 2.
or OD-BH-KS03 2. Click ! 3.
IP20
6. Click ! 3.
F 6.
F BH630...
7.
F
6.
BH630...
7.
8. 1.
M10
1.
M10
4.
32 4.
314
50 ÷ 300 mm2 Cu ( Klauke ) 20 Nm ... 8 13
50 ÷ 240 mm2 Al ( Klauke ) 5.
17
5.
10.,5
8.
50 50
20 Nm ... 8
9.
6. 0.8 Nm
F
16
9.
0.8 Nm 32
Front connection- BH reduction for circuit breaker BA…39 and J2UX Rear connection - BH reduction for circuit breaker BA…39 and J2UX
with rear connection
70 44
70
CS-BH-A039
2.
OD-BHD-KS0 2 NOT INCLUDED IN ORDER
Click ! 3.
25
ø1
1
BH630...
308
15
6.
7. F
20 Nm
CS-BH-A021 CS-BH-Z039
2.
1.
1.
M10
20 Nm ... 8 mm
4.
BH630...
308
11
20 Nm ... 8
25
8.
5.
70 70
MAX. 20
9.
0.8 Nm
15
3.
44
5.
4.
20 Nm ... 8 mm
0.8 Nm
6.
F21
Deionization spaces
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5 a) if Ue ≥ AC 415 V, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or a OD-BHD-KS03

(upper side) terminal cover
- terminals 2, 4, 6 only in case that circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the source using terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side) and furthermore:
a) if Ue ≥ AC 415 V, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or a OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
- rear connection - insulating barriers and terminal covers need not be used
PLUG-IN AND WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE - insulating barriers and terminal covers need not be used
F22
Deionization spaces
C=20 B=140 B=140 B=140 C=20
H
A…minimum distance between the circuit breaker/
E=105 G=80
OD-BHD-KS02 /switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
(applicable for connection using insulated conductors,
cables, flexibars or with rear connection)
A1…minimum insulation length of bare conductors

A2
(using OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers from 100 mm
100 ÷ 150
A1
to max. 150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for

the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A
A2…minimum distance:
F=0 G=0
uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated
conductors and busbars)
busbar
275
- between two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

situated vertically above one another
- between uninsulated connections of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, G…minimum distance between the cir-

cuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated
20
earthed wall
H…minimum distance between uninsulated con-

ductors
minimum distance of circuit breakers without using

H
Busbar of uninsulated barriers is 50 mm
max.3 mm
> 15 mm
max.3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
AC U [V] 230 415 500 690

BH630S wired with Ik” [kA] ≤ 100 > 36 ÷ 65 ≤ 36 > 20 ÷ 35 ≤ 20 > 15 ÷ 20 ≤ 15
BH630N wired with Ik” [kA] ≤ 60 ≤ 36 ≤ 20 ≤ 15
G [mm] H [mm]
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 13 A1 [mm] 150 200 100 200 150 250 150
A2 [mm] 250 300 200 300 250 350 250
< 80
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 30 A1 [mm] 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 [mm] 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
A [mm] 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
≥ 80 ≥ 13 A1 [mm] 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 [mm] 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
note: Ik“ - max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms)
F23
Dimensions
45 45
2 103
100 ... < AC 415 V

150 ... > AC 415 V
100
25 6
18
75,5
75.5
45
60
60
25°
17°
234
259
201
194
275
194
65
2°
154
33
R94
5)
x2
(M5
134,5
134.5
Ø5
4x
45.5
45,5
40.5
40,5
25 20 47,5
47.5 45
Ø1
1
33 105
140 117 5
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BH-B021, CS-BH-B022 connecting sets)
45 45 105
42 28
25
46,2
140
369
344
298
275
234
194
435
269
319
32
Ø22 Ø22 CS-BH-B021

Ø18 Ø18 CS-BH-B022
F24
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BH-B014 connecting set)
105
60
49
38
26
45 45
34 34
46,2
140
251
274
297
326
308
285
262
234
194
275
435
11
25
ø8,4
8.4
ø8,4
8.4
ø8,4
8.4
105
45 45 25 28 28
194
421
396
304
449
350
234
435
325
279
371
32 ø22 ø22 ø22
F25
Dimensions
105
45 45
25 23 23
279
371
325
421
435
449
234
396
350
304
194
Ø18 Ø18 Ø18

32
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 connecting set) Drilling diagram
53 105
3
45 45 125
11.5 26
9
11,5
6
20
45 45
60
194
234
275
194
275
234
65
154
)
25
45 5x
5 (M
xØ
2.5
2,5
R7 4
25
Ø1
1
35
140
20,5
20.5
40,5
40.5
F26
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection Fixed design, front connection

(CS-BH-A039 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS39 mounting set) (CS-BH-A037 connecting set)
70 70 50 50
45 45 3 31 6 45 45
31 6
19,5
19.5
16,5
16.5
25
45
45
140
308
234
275
194
314
234
194
275
32
56.5
56,5
Ø1
15 25
1
32 32
ø1
Ø1
3
1
12,5
12.5
140
32 32
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BH-Z039 connecting set, OD-BH-MZ39 mounting set)
210 6 27,5
27.5 3
11
Ø7
xØ
70
4x
5
12
25 15
140
140
40,5
40.5
308
395
275
360
25
53 105 70 70
F27
Dimensions
60
BH630...
RP-BH-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
37
51
50
143
°
90
25° 140
70 RP-BH-CK..
BH630... RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BHD-CH..
37
70
51
143
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
25° 140
180 ÷ 495 (CH10)
375 ÷ 540 (CH20)
MIN. 100 27.5
6.5
4x
55
50
55
F28
Dimensions
140
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BH-CK30
°
90
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BHD-CP..
45°
71
143
RP-BHD-CH...
BH630...
30 163
50 - 362 (CH10)
238 - 427 (CH20)
140
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BH-CK31 70
RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CH...
143
BH630...
°
90
°
45
50
163
71 70 - 382 (CH10)
258 - 447 (CH20)
Fixed design, MP-BH-X... motor drive Opening dimensions in switchboard door

for external counter of cycles
31
1
ax
m
R
14
275
27
204
149
92
140 247
F29
Dimensions
25 6
45 45 18
5
ø6,.
44xxØ
66,.55
44xxØø
179
45
166
194
358
342
317
234
277
277
166
358
284
20
26
96
96
40.5
40.5
40,5
40,5
20 45 47,5
47.5 47,5
Ø
25 45 47.5
11
33 35
140 105
Plug-in device, OD-BH-KS03 terminal cover
103
70
140 35
105
518
F30
Dimensions
Plug-in design
187
140 105
358
140
157
Plug-in design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 connecting set) Drilling diagram
53
20 105 125
3
6
26
9
67
166
317
317
66,.55
44xxøø
45
58
ø1
96
25
1
35
20.5
20,5
40,5
40.5 45 47,5
47.5
F31
Dimensions
225
175
282 31
F32
Dimensions
Plug-in device (CS-BH-JX75 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set)

2x 70 70 20 16
ø1
0
25 15
77,5
77.5
4x
ø5
358
483
433
182
77,5
77.5
32
160
Plug-in device (CS-BH-JT75 connecting set, OD-BH-MT75 mounting set)

2x 70 70 20 16
ø1
1
25 15
125
126,5
126.5
4xø
6
180
578
528
358
125
32
160
F33
Dimensions
25 6
45 45 18
,5
ø6.
44xxØ
,5
ø6.
44xxØ
179
45
358
342
317
284
166
194
234
277
358
277
166
20
26
96
96
40,5
40.5
40.5
40,5
25 20 45 47,5 45 47,5
47.5
Ø
47.5
11
33 35
140 105
Withdrawable device, OD-BH-KS03 terminal cover

103
215 70
140 35
204
105
518
140
214 140 27,5

27.5
F34
Dimensions
217
213 187 105
140 105 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
215 140 170
157 187
Withdrawable design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 connecting set) Working position Inspection position
213 53
140 105 125
3
6
26
9
20
67
65
358
166
317
317
,.5
øø66
44xx
45
58
ø11
96
25
35
215 45 47,5
47.5
20,5
20.5
53 140
F35
Dimensions
255
225 30
124
124
140
140
175 205
312 31
282 31 30
124
124
140
140
F36
Dimensions
Withdrawable device (CS-BH-JT75 connecting set, OD-BH-MT75 mounting set)

2x
ø1 70 70 20 16
0
25 15
77,5
77.5
4x
ø5
124
358
483
433
182
140
77,5
77.5
32
160
Withdrawable device (CS-BH-JX75 connecting set, OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set)

2x 20 16
ø1 70 70
1
25 15
125
126,5
126.5
4x
ø6
124
180
358
578
528
140
125
32
160,1
160.1
F37
Dimensions
45 45 45
2 103
100 ... < AC 415 V

150 ... > AC 415 V
25 6
18
75,5
45
60 60
25°
17°
194
259
234
201
194
275
65
2°
154
33
R94
134.5
134,5
,5
ø6
4x
45.5
45,5
40,5
ø1
25 20 92,5 45 47,5
1
33 105
185 117 5
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BH-B021 + CS-BH-B421, CS-BH-B022 + CS-BH-B422 connecting sets )
105
42 28
25
45 45 45
45
269
319
344
369
298
194
435
275
234
32
ø22 ø22 CS-BH-B021

ø18 ø18 CS-BH-B022
F38
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BH-B014 + CS-BH-B414 connecting sets)
105
38 11
11
45 45 45
26
45
185
251
274
326
308
285
262
234
194
275
435
297
25 11
6xø8,5
6xø8.5
105
45 45 45 25 28 28
449
421
396
350
435
304
234
194
325
279
371
ø22 ø22 ø22

32
F39
Dimensions
105
45 45 45 25 23 23
421
449
396
350
435
304
234
194
279
371
325
32 Ø18 Ø18 Ø18
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
53 105 170
3
26
9
11.5
11,5
6
20
45 45 40 7,5
7.5
60
194
234
275
234
275
194
65
154
55
66,.
2,5
2.5
xøø
45
44x
R
7
25
ø1
1
35
185
20,5
20.5
40,5
40.5
F40
Dimensions
105
BH630...
RP-BH-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
37
0
51 50
143
°
90
25° 140
Fixed design, hand drive - front, with adjustable lever Switchboard door modification
70 RP-BH-CK..
MIN. 145 27.5
27,5
BH630... RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CN..
5
RP-BHD-CH.. ø66.5,
44xx
ZÁVĚS DVEŘÍ ROZVÁDĚČE
DOOR HINGE
37
55
50
70
0
51
SWITCHBOARD
55
143
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
PANEL ROZVÁDĚČE
°
90
25° 140
180 ÷ 495 (CH10)
1
375 ÷ 540 (CH20)
Fixed design, motor drive Opening dimensions in switchboard door

for external counter of cycles
1
31
ax
m
R
14
27
204
149
92
247
F41
Dimensions
25 6
45 45 45 18
.5,5
øø66
44xx
5
6.,5
øø6
44xx
179
45
358
342
317
284
166
194
234
277
277
166
358
20
26
96
96
40,5
40.5
40,5
25 20 45 47,5
47.5 45 47,5
47.5
ø1
1
33 35
105
185
Plug-in device, OD-BH-KS43 terminal cover
103
70
35
105
518
F42
Dimensions
Plug-in design
187
185 105
358
140
157
Plug-in design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
53 170
185 20 105 45
3
6
26
9
67
358
166
317
317
.,5
ø6
4x
58
ø1
96
25
1
35
20,5
20.5
40,5
40.5 45 47,5
47.5
3
F43
Dimensions
185 225
358
175
185 282 31
358
F44
Dimensions
259 25 6
45 45 45 18
.,5
ø6
4x
179
45
358
358
342
317
284
166
194
234
277
166
20
26
96
96
40,5
40.5
25 20 45 47,5
47.5
ø1
1
33 35
185 105
260
Withdrawable device, OD-BH-KS43 terminal cover

103
260 70
185 35
204
105
518
140
140 27,5
27.5
F45
Dimensions
217
258 187 105
185 105 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
260 140 170
157 187
Withdrawable design, rear connection (CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421 connecting sets) Drilling diagram
258 53 170
185 105 45
3
6
26
9
20
67
65
358
317
166
5.5
66,
xøø
44x
58
ø11
96
25
35
260 45 47,5
47.5
20,5
20.5
53 140
3
F46
Dimensions
258 255
185 225 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
260 175 205
258 312 31
185 282 31 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
260
F47
Description
Plug-in device
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is Signalling of position SO-BHD-0010
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid Plug-in device may be fitted with a maximum of four
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for signalling
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed. the inserted/removed position.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for assem-
bling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug-in de- Keying set OD-BH-KK01
sign from the originally fixed design Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be fitted with keying
components of the plug-in device are: set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into
- base of the plug-in device the plug-in device.
- 2 connecting sets - for fitting onto the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switch- Circuit breaker accessories in plug-in design
ing off of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting Circuit breaker in plug-in design has the same accessories as
and removal) the fixed circuit breaker.
ZO-BH-0630-300
- set of mounting bolts - for affixing circuit breaker to
plug-in device (set of mounting bolts is used to fasten Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
the plug-in device into the switchboard, that is includ- unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker ed in delivery of switching unit) position
in plug-in design option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent
Circuit breaker positions inserting of circuit breaker
Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions: visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
1. inserted (working position) easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
2. removed IP20 degree of protection of all termination points
plug-in device does not need earthing
Power circuit
connecting set CS-BH-A011 is used for connecting with bus-
bars or cable lugs, that is included in delivery of switching unit
necting sets, see page F8
page F18 OD-BH-KK01
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire connecting cable
Locking plug-in device against
inserting circuit breaker OD-BHD-KA01.
OD-BHD-KA01
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in plug-in device
according to circuit breaker position
Cavity 11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)
1
Circuit breaker
position 2 4
SO-BHD-0010
Inserted 0 1
Removed 1 0
1)
Position of cavities
for switch SO-BHD-0010 Specifications SO-BHD-0010
in plug-in device Type SO-BHD-0010
DC 220 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 500 V
11, 12, 13, 14 Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie /Ue AC-13 3 A / AC 400 V,
Ie /Ue DC-15 3.5 A / DC 24 V, 1 A / DC 48 V, 0.3 A / DC 110 V, 0.15 A / DC 220 V
OD-BH-KK01
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in plug-in device with accessories see page F16.
F48

During the manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in
steps may be done:
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit breaker,

see „Recommended circuit breaker manipulation“ below
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F71
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive Recommended process of manipulation
After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in de-
sign is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
1 2
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when removing circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker before removing State of switches before removing - inserted position State of switches after removing - removed position
1)
Cavity 1 2 3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9) 1 2 3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
(loaded state)
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary release,

or by TEST push button or by the switch off button on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
the motor drive
1)
cavities 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4-pole design
F49
Description
Withdrawable device
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector Signalling of position SO-BHD-0010
is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid Withdrawable device can be fitted with the switches for
exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent checking and both signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted/with-
visual and conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed. drawn/removed.
withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in with- Power circuit
drawable design from the originally fixed design connecting set CS-BH-A011 is used for connecting with bus-
components of the withdrawable device are: bars or cable lugs, that is included in delivery of switching unit
- base of the withdrawable device for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use con-
- 2 movable side plates necting sets, see page F8
- 2 connecting sets - for fitting onto the switching unit connection must comply with our recommendations, see
ZV-BH-0630-300 - interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching page F18
off of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting and Auxiliary circuits
withdrawing) These are connected using 15-wire cable OD-BHD-KA01.
- set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery Circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design
of switching unit Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has the same acces-
Circuit breaker sories as fixed circuit breaker.
in withdrawable design Circuit breaker positions
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions: Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
1. inserted (working position) unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit
2. withdrawn (inspection position) breaker and arrestment positions
3. removed checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
inspection position
Keying set OD-BH-KK01 locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker,
Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be fitted with locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating) position,
keying set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking) position -
into the withdrawable device. locking by means of padlocks
Locking withdrawable visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
device against inserting easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
circuit breaker States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device IP20 degree of protection of all termination points
according to circuit breaker and arrestment positions withdrawable device does not need earthing
Cavity 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17 16, 18
(19, 20)1)
1 1 1
OD-BH-KK01
Circuit breaker and
2 4 2 4 2 4
arrestment position
Inserted and not arrested 0 1 1 0 0 1
Inserted and arrested 0 1 1 0 1 0
Locking withdrawable OD-BHD-KA01
circuit breaker against Withdrawn and not arrested 1 0 0 1 0 1
tampering Withdrawn and arrested 1 0 0 1 1 0
Removed and not arrested 1 0 1 0 0 1
Removed and arrested 1 0 1 0 1 0
- operating state is always in arrested position SO-BHD-0010
- in arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable device (for
more information see„Advantages and enhanced safety for operator“)
1)
Position of cavities for switch cavities 19 and 20 are only for 4-pole design
SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device Specifications SO-BHD-0010
Type SO-BHD-0010
DC 220 V
15, 17 Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 500 V
Rated operating current Ie /Ue AC-13 3 A / AC 400 V,
OD-BH-KK01 11, 12, 13, 14
16, 18
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories see page F16.
F50

During the manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
steps may be done:
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit breaker,

see „Recommended circuit breaker manipulation“ below
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F71
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design with motor drive

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
design is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
1 2
State before insertion/withdrawal State after insertion/withdrawal
State of circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion - withdrawn position State of switches after insertion - inserted position
State of circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal - inserted position State of switches after withdrawal - withdrawn position
Cavity 1 2 3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1) 1 2 3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
(loaded state)
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary release,

or by TEST push button or by the switch off button on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
the motor drive
1)
F51
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - DTV3 3P 4P
Short-circuit release Reduced current Thermal memory Properties

SE-BH-0250-DTV3 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
setting of short-circuit release Ii in two steps, 4 IR or 12.5 IR
In = 400 A
SE-BH-0400-DTV3
In = 630 A Data for the project

SE-BH-0630-DTV3
Switching unit BH630…
Overcurrent release SE-BH-…
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (…. x IR)
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
F52

SE-BH-0250-MTV8 transformers and generators
setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
and possibility of switching the short-circuit release off
with a delay of 50 ms
In = 400 A setting of IR, tR and Ii by means of the rotary switches is stepwise
SE-BH-0400-MTV8

SE-BH-0630-MTV8
Mode TV
t
IR
IMPORTANT
of failure
Ii
F53

SE-BH-0250-MTV8 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
In = 400 A setting of IR, tR and Ii by means of the rotary switches is stepwise
SE-BH-0400-MTV8

SE-BH-0630-MTV8
Mode M
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
F54
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - L001 3P 4P
In = 250 A
SE-BH-0250-L001
In = 315 A
SE-BH-0315-L001
Properties
suitable for protection of lines with low impulse currents
reduced current cannot be set
thermal release cannot be switched off
In = 400 A short-circuit release is fixed at 4 In
SE-BH-0400-L001
In = 500 A
SE-BH-0500-L001

In = 630 A
SE-BH-0630-L001
Short-circuit release current Ii …. A (4x In)
t
In
IMPORTANT
Ii
F55

In = 250 A TV mode suitable for protection of lines, distribution trans-
SE-BH-0250-MTV9 formers and generators – enables setting of time selectivity
setting of the value of selective release Isd in 4 steps (inde-
pendent time-delayed release)
200 ms or 300 ms
In = 400 A
SE-BH-0400-MTV9
the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set by
the manufacturer to minimum

SE-BH-0630-MTV9
Mode TV
Selective release value Isd …. A (…x IR)

t
IR
IMPORTANT
of failure
Isd tsd
Ii
F56

In = 250 A M mode suitable for protection of motors – enables set-
SE-BH-0250-MTV9 ting of time selectivity
In = 400 A 200 ms or 300 ms
SE-BH-0400-MTV9

SE-BH-0630-MTV9
Mode M
Selective release value Isd …. A (…x IR)

t
IR
IMPORTANT
tR - the motor will be protected in phase failure
thermal release delay tR must correspond to
Isd tsd
Ii
F57
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - 4D01 4P
Short-circuit
Rated current Motor starting release Properties
SE-BH-0250-4D01 transformers with protected „N“ conductor in TN-C-S and
TN-S networks
(2 ÷ 9) IR
setting of the value of reduced current IN and short-circuit
current IiN in the 4th pole
In = 400 A setting of IR, tR, IN and IiN by means of rotary switches is stepwise
SE-BH-0400-4D01
the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set by
the manufacturer to minimum

SE-BH-0630-4D01
Level of reduced current in the 4th pole IN …. A (…x IR )
Level of reduced current in the 4th pole IiN …. A (… x Ii )
t IR
IMPORTANT
IN
of failure
Ii
F58
SWITCHES 3P 4P
Specifications
Type PS-BHD-..00 PS-BHD-..00-Au1)
Ue DC 60 ÷ 500 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
PS-BHD-1000 Rated operating current Ie /Ue AC-15 6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 2 A/500 V AC-12, DC-12 0.004 ÷ 0.5 A/5 V,
Ie /Ue DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.2 A/500 V 0.004 ÷ 0.01/60 V
Thermal current Ith 10 A 0.5 A
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 01, 10, 02, 11, 20
PS-BHD-1100
Type SP-BHD-0002 PS-BHD-0010/0020 PS-BHD-0010-Au/0020-Au1)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 250 V AC 60 ÷ 250 V AC 5 ÷ 60 V
Ue - AC 60 ÷ 250 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V 250 V 250 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie /Ue 1 A / AC 250 V AC-15 1.5 A / AC 250 V AC-12, DC-12 0.004 ÷ 0.5 A / 5V,
Ie /Ue DC-13 0.2 A / DC 250 V 0.004 ÷ 0.01 / 60V
Thermal current Ith - 6A 0.5 A
PS-BHD-0010
Arrangement of contacts 02, 11, 20 001/002 001/002
Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch) IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature range -25 °C ÷ +55 °C -25 °C ÷ +55 °C -25 °C ÷ +55 °C
1)
PS-BHD-….- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Type designation, number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement
Arrangement of contacts Type Number of contacts Contact types
PS-BHD-0020 10 PS-BHD-1000 (-Au) 1 make
11 PS-BHD-1100 (-Au) 1+1 break+make
001 PS-BHD-0010 (-Au) 1 make-and-break
SP-BHD-0002 002 PS-BHD-0020(-Au) 2 make-and-break

Function and names of switches according to their location in cavities
Cavity 1 Signal signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
Cavity 2 Relative signals tripping of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector by releases, TEST push button or
by switch off button on the motor drive
Cavity 3, 4, 5 (6, 7, 8, 9)2) Auxiliary signals position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector’s main contacts
Cavities in BH630... switching unit Cavity 10 Early makes/breaks in advance before making the main contact of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
2)
3, 4, 5 3, 4, 5
Cavity 1 2 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2
(6, 7, 8, 9)1) (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-X...-0001
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-1100
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
State
of circuit breaker
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
electrically (loaded state) 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Switched off by overcurrent release 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
1)
note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed cavities 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4-pole design
F59
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Specifications
Type SV-BHD-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA
DC <3W
SV-BHD-X230 Characteristic U ≥ 0.7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip

Loading time ∞

operating voltage
Ue Type
Cavities in BH630... switching unit AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V SV-BHD-X024
AC/DC 110 V SV-BHD-X110
AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V SV-BHD-X230
It is always set to the maximum value by default Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
(see fig. 1).

C1
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
5.4 5.3 20
4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1
3.4 3.3
C2
0
Auxiliary switch
5.2 5.1 30
4.2
14 4.1
13 1
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch
20
1
2.4 2.3
0
Relative switch
30 States and positions of circuit breaker/

1
2.2 2.1
0 /switch-disconnector lever
Lever position
States of circuit breaker/
of circuit breaker/
1 /switch-disconnector
/switch-disconnector
0
Switched on
1
Switched off by releases, TEST
0 or by switch off button on the
motor drive
Switched off manually or by
1 5
10 3
4
10 2
motor drive electrically (loaded

10
50
00
10
50
50
t [ms ] state)
F60
SHUNT TRIPS 3P 4P
Specifications

Shunt trip
1
SV
0
>50
1
OK
0
t (ms)

Shunt trip
HK 1
0
50
1
SV
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 700
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)

States of circuit Lever position of circuit Symbol Description
breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector HK Main contacts
Switched on OK Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
button on the motor drive SV Control voltage on the shunt trip
Switched off manually or by motor drive SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
F61
Specifications
Type SP-BHD-X… SP-BHD-X…-00012)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA < 3 VA
DC <3W <3W
Characteristic 1) U ≥ 0.85 Ue - it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
SP-BHD-X230 U ≤ 0.35 Ue - the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switching off 20 ms 20 ms
Loading time ∞ ∞
Degree of protection of terminals (connected release) IP20 IP20
Position in cavity No. 10 10
Early switch
Rated operating voltage Ue - AC 250 V
Rated frequency fn - 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ie /Ue - 1 A / AC 250 V
Umístění dutin
Cavities ve spínacím
in BH630... bloku BH630...
switching unit
Arrangement of contacts - 10, 01
Connection cross-section S - 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch) - IP20
1)
2)
cannot be used in combination with motor drive MP-BH-X....
Number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement operating voltage
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types Ue Type
01 1 break AC 24, 40, 48 V SP-BHD-X024
10 1 make AC/DC 110 V SP-BHD-X110
AC 230, 400, 500 V / DC 220 V SP-BHD-X230
It is always set to the maximum value by default
(see fig. 1).
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching off
by undervoltage repase
D1
D1
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
5.4 5.3 30
4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1
D2
D2
3.4 3.3
0
Auxiliary switch
5.2 5.1 30
4.2
14 4.1
13 1
3.2 3.1
0
Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
Relative switch
30
1
2.4 2.3
0
Relative switch
30
States and positions of circuit breaker/
1
2.2 2.1
switch-disconnector lever
0
Early switch Lever position
States of circuit breaker/
of circuit breaker/
10.Y2 10.Y 1 0
10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch Switched on
20
10.Y2 10.Y 1 1 Switched off by releases, TEST
10.Y4 10.Y 3
0 or by switch off button on the
motor drive
Switched off manually or by
1 5 motor drive electrically
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
50
(loaded state)
t [ms ]
F62
Specifications

1
SP
0
>50
1
OK
OK
0
t (ms)

HK 1
0
50
1
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 700
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)

States of circuit Lever position of circuit Symbol Description
breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector HK Main contacts
Switched on OK Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
button on the motor drive SV Control voltage on the shunt trip
Switched off manually or by motor drive SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
F63
HAND DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
The hand drive permits control the circuit breaker/switch-
disconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines
on and off. Modular conception of the drives enables simple
mounting on the switching unit (also additionally) after the
cover of cavities is removed. The fixed drive can be sealed.
The drive and its accessories are ordered separately accord-
ing to your choice, see page F12.
RP-BH-CK10 + RP-BHD-CP10
Hand drive unit RP-BH-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..

Hand drive unit RP-BH-CK.. Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page F28
+ Extension shaft RP-BHD-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BHD-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BHD-CP..
The hand drive unit is fixed directly to switching unit of the

circuit breaker.
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door and it
provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
Hand drive lever is fixed on the hand drive unit or on the hand
drive bearing.
RP-BH-CK21 + RP-BHD-CH10 + RP-BHD-CN41 + RP-BHD-CP21 The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable
length 252 ÷ 416 mm).
Enhanced safety for operator:

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS see page F28
with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in position
„switched off manually“. The unit and lever of the hand drive By a screwdriver it is possible to unlock the mechanism block-
can be locked using three padlocks with shank diameter ing the switchboard door opening with the circuit breaker
max. 6 mm. switched on (for bearing RP-BHD-CN40 and RP-BHD-CN41).
Each hand drive bearing prevents the door from opening
when the circuit breaker is switched on or in a state of be-
ing switched off by releases and in the circuit breaker state
„switched off manually“ and hand drive lever is locked up.
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be fitted also
with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical par-
allel switching, see page F65.
Specifications
Type Description Colour Locking while the circuit Degree of switched on „switched off manually” and locked Switchboard door opening with Length [mm]
RP-BH-CK10 Hand drive unit blue no - - - - -
RP-BH-CK20 Hand drive unit blue yes - - - - -
RP-BH-CK21 Hand drive unit yellow yes - - - - -
RP-BH-CK30 Hand drive unit - right side blue - - - - - -
RP-BH-CK31 Hand drive unit - left side blue - - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP10 Hand drive lever black no - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP20 Hand drive lever black yes - - - - -
RP-BHD-CP21 Hand drive lever red yes - - - - -
RP-BHD-CN40 Hand drive bearing black - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BHD-CN41 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP40 yes yes yes -
RP-BHD-CN60 Hand drive bearing black - IP66 yes yes no -
RP-BHD-CN61 Hand drive bearing yellow - IP66 yes yes no -
RP-BHD-CH10 Extension shaft - - - - - - 365 (can be shortened)
RP-BHD-CH20 Extension shaft - telescopic - - - - - - 252 ÷ 416
F64
RP-BHD-CB10 Mechanical interlocking
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit L

RP-BHD-CB10 can be used between two BH630 circuit breakers or between
BH630 and BD250 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must X
be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand drive
unit and hand drive lever), see page F63.
In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to
comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure and
given in the table.
BD250..3.. BD250..4.. BH630..3.. BH630..4..
Dimension [mm] X L X L X L X L
Left switching unit
BD250..3.. 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5

BD250..4.. 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5
BH630..3.. 122.5 128.5 157.5 162.5 140 145.5 185 189
BH630..4.. 122.5 128.5 157.5 162.5 140 145.5 185 189
RP-BHD-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Enables for simultaneous switching of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used
between two BH6301) circuit breakers or between BH630
RP-BHD-CD10
and BD250 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be
equipped with hand drive unit and hand drive lever, see X
page F63. In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely
necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown in
the figure and given in the table. Cannot be used in combina-
tion with extension shaft (RP-BHD-CH10 and RP-BHD-CH20).
BD250..3.. BD250..4.. BH630..3.. BH630..4.. 1)
Dimension [mm] Xmin Xmax Xmin Xmax Xmin Xmax Xmin Xmax
Left switching unit
+7 -7 +7 -7 +7 -7
BD250..3.. 105 164.5 122.5 164.5 122.5 164.5 x x
BD250..4.. 105+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 122.5+7 164.5-7 x x
BH630..3.. 122.5+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 x x
BH630..4.. 122.5+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 140+7 164.5-7 x x
1)
Switching unit BH630..4.. (4-pole design) can only be on the left side
F65
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING 3P 4P
MB-BH-PV04
MB-BHD-PV03
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/ BH630 BD250
Type of circuit breakers
/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped BH630 BH630
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit Type of mechanical interlocking MB-BH-PV04 MB-BHD-PV03
MB-BHD-PV04 breakers may be switched off simultaneously.
Mechanical interlocking MB-BH-PV04 is intended for two
BH630 circuit breakers. Interlocking MB-BHD-PV03 is intend-
ed for one BH630 circuit breaker and one BD250.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdraw-
able designs.
Circuit breaker placement in switchboard

Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,
which you may download from our website www.oez.com.

During the manipulation with circuit breaker with mechanical Recommended process of manipulation
interlocking and motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach the 1) Shunt trip/undervoltage release must be used to switch
state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor drive off the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker switching off can-
is unsuccessful. Switching on is executed after repeated make not be made by motor drive
impulse. To avoid this effect, some of the following steps may 2) Circuit breaker can be stored and switched on only if
be done: the second circuit breaker is in switch-off mode. Circuit
breaker status indicator on motor drive is in „O“ position.
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit breaker, Between storing and switching on the circuit breaker,
see „Recommended circuit breaker manipulation“ below it is necessary to keep the time interval min. 100 ms.
2) To connect OD-BHD-R… control relay into the motor drive Switch „S“ must be disconnected.
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F72 3) In case of infringement of these principles, the first
switching on of circuit breaker is unsuccessful.
148
0
=4
Rmin
0-700
45
30 min. 80
F66
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Description
It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch - automatic accumulation of energy is switched off (S switch
OFF/ON). open): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcur-
Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit rent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push button
breaker cover of cavities is removed. or by the switch off button on the motor drive both motor
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand by drive and circuit breaker stay in position „ switched off by
units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric devices releases“. In this position motor drive waits for the impulse
is needed. from switch S. When the impulse is brought in the motor
In order to speed up the circuit breaker’s switch off (e.g. safety drive accumulates energy (turn on the circuit breaker) and
STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt trip can be used. after this loading the motor drive is ready to switch on the
MP-BH-X230 On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over circuit breaker. It is not possible to switch on the circuit
switch to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL: breaker when motor drive is not loaded
- AUTO mode – remote control. The circuit breaker is Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy
controlled by buttons for remote switch off/on, fur- signals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state can
thermore in this position mechanical control can be be signalled from a distance.
used on the front panel of the motor drive The drive may be furnished with an electromechanical counter
- MANUAL mode – manual control. Control voltage is not of cycles:
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using - internal design on the motor drive cover
the green switch on button and switched off using - external design OD-BHD-PP01 for mounting on the switch-
the red switch off button on the front part of the drive board’s door or inside the switchboard by means of metal
cover. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off is holder, that is part of the delivery
functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by Motor drive can be sealed by means of bolt sealing insert
means of hinged lever. (OD-BH-VP01).
Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/MANUAL Drive can be locked in off position by up to three padlocks
switch. (shank diameter max. 4.3 mm).
Switch S (external switch – has to be bought separately) Switch on button can be covered and sealed (OD-BHD-
enables the choice of automatic accumulation of energy (circuit KT01).
breaker loading). Drive is connected by multi-pole connector with cavities
- automatic accumulation of energy is on (S switch switched (in order to connect cables special tongs have to be used).
on): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent Drive can be furnished with cable (OD-BHD-KA02) that has
release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push button or by on one side connector to the motor drive and on the other
DIMENSIONS, see page F29 the switch off button on the motor drive motor drive im- side free terminals for connection to etc. switchboard’s ter-
mediately accumulates energy (circuit breaker loading), minal block.
motor drive is then ready to switch on the circuit breaker
Specifications
Type MP-BH-X…, MP-BH-X…-P
Operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Control impulse length for storage 400 ms ÷ ∞ 1)
Control impulse length for switching on 20 ÷ 700 ms 1)
for switching off 400 ms ÷ ∞ 1)
Time to switching on < 60 ms
OD-BHD-KT01 Mechanical endurance 20 000 cycles
DC 100 W
Protection AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V LTN-4C-1; LTN-2C-1
DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V LTN-UC-4C-1; LTN-UC-2C-1
Rated operating current Ie /Ue 5 A / AC 250 V
of the change-over switch AUTO/MANUAL 0.5 A / DC 250 V
Type OD-BHD-KA02
OD-BHD-KA02 Conductor cross-section S 0.35 mm2
1)
for sequence of control impulses, see page F70
F67
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
2 1 50 2 1 900
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 0 6 5 0
5.4 5.3 50 5.4 5.3 900

4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1 4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1
3.4 3.3 0 3.4 3.3 0
5.2 5.1 50 5.2 5.1 900

4.2
14 4.1
13 1 4.2
14 4.1
13 1
3.2 3.1 0 3.2 3.1
0
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
1 1
2.2 2.1 0 2.2 2.1
0
Early switch Early switch
20 900
1 1
10.Y2 10.Y 1 0 10.Y2 10.Y 1 0
10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch 10.Y4 10.Y 3 Early switch
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y 1
1 10.Y2 10.Y 1 1
10.Y4 10.Y 3 0 10.Y4 10.Y 3 0
1 5 1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
00
10
50
10
50
50
50
t [ms] t [ms ]
Diagram
Lever position of
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Q3
L+
Switched on
ON
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off button
S on the motor drive
OF F
B Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically
(loaded state)
Motorový pohon
Motor drive
Wiring diagram description
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
Symbol Description
X3
MP motor drive MP-BH-X...
M motor
P storage device
NC NO NC NO
S6 S5
C C X4 connector for external counter of cycles
M P S5 switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL modes (NC-C)
S6 switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
MP B recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in motor
drive order)
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 ON switch off button
PE N- S switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, may be
continuously switched on)
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page F66
F68
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by overcurrent release Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by shunt trip or
(S switch in switched on state-automatic storage) undervoltage release (switch S in switched on state-automatic storage)
2 1 20 2 1 20
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
5.4 5.3 20 5.4 5.3 30

4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1 4.4
3.4 4.3
3.3 1
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3
0 0
5.2 5.1 30 5.2 5.1 30

4.2
14 4.1
13 1 4.2
14 4.1
13 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
20 650 30 650
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
30 650 30 650
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
Signal switch
20 650
1 1
1.2 1.1
0 0
Signal switch
30 650
1 1
1.4 1.3
0 0
1 5 1 5
10 3
10 3
4
4
10 2
10 2
10
10
50
50
0
0
00
00
10
10
50
50
50
50
t [ms ] t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push button) Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push
and tripping by shunt trip button) a tripping by undervoltage release
Ovládací
Control obvod
Control obvod
circuit of motor drive
Q3 Q3
L+ L+
ON ON
S S
OF F OF F
B B
Motorový pohon
Motor drive Motorový pohon
Motor drive
D1
D1
C1
C1
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
X3 X3
SV -BHD-X...
SV -BHD-X...
NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO
SP-BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
S6 S5 S6 S5
C C C C
or or
M P M P
MP MP
11 8 6 2 2 1 11 8 6 2 2 1
D2
D2
C2
C2
X3 X4 J X3 X4 J
cavityč.10
dutina No.10 cavity
dutinaNo.10
č.10
N- N-
PE N- PE N-
Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles Poč. cyklů
Counter of cycles
F69
MOTOR DRIVE 3P 4P
Specifications

Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and switching
- S switch permanently switched on (automatic storage) or open on by motor drive - S switch permanently switched on (automatic storage)
800 50 50
HK 1 HK 1
0 0
800 > 600 520 > 880
PS 1 RS 1
0 0
>100 > 1 400
> 1 400
400 ÷ ∞ 20 ÷ 700 20 ÷ 700
1 1
0 0
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and

switching on by motor drive - S switch switched on only for storing up
Description of graphs
50
Symbol Description
HK 1
HK main contacts
0
X+520 > 880 PS auxiliary switch
RS relative switch
RS 1
0 R OFF circuit breaker closing instant by release of circuit breaker
>100
X > 1 400 IMP S impulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S switch)
400 ÷ ∞ 20 ÷ 700 IMP ON make impulse for the motor drive
1
IMP S IMP ON
0 IMP OFF break impulse for the motor drive
R OFF t [ms ] X random segment of time

Lever position
States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off button

on the motor drive
(loaded state)
F70
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breaker

control circuits in withdrawable/plug-in design with motor drive
Switching off by motor drive
Q3
L+
S
Diagram description
OFF ON
Symbol Description
M motor
P storage device
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5 T 1 A1 K1
3.PS-BHD-1000
1.PS-BHD-0100
X3

S5 switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL modes
OD-BHD-R... 3.3 1.1 YC external counter of cycles OD-BHD-PP01
3.4 1.2
NC NO NC NO OFF switch off button
3 4 A2 K2
S6 S5 S switch for energy storage
C C Q3 motor drive circuit breaker for AC 24 V LTN-4C-1
M P for AC 48 V LTN-4C-1
MP
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 OD-BHD-R… control relay for AC/DC 24 V
YC
for AC/DC 48 V
for AC 110 ÷ 230 V
PE N- for DC 110 V
3.PS-BHD-1000 auxiliary switch
F71
MOTOR DRIVES 3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breakers control circuits

with mechanical interlocking and motor drive (applicable for any circuit breaker)
Switching off is possible only by undervoltage release or shunt trip
Q3
L+
OFF OFF ON
12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5 T 1 A1 K1
13.PS-BHD-1000
23.PS-BHD-1000
X3
1.PS-BHD-0100
OD-BHD-R... 3.3 1.1 3.3
SP-BHD-X...
3.4 1.2 3.4

SV-BHD-X...
NC NO NC NO
3 4 A2 K2
S6 S5
C1
D1
C C
M P
D2
C2
MP
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4
YC
PE N-
Diagram description
Symbol Description
M motor
P storage device
S5 switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL modes
S6 switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
OD-BHD-R… control relay for AC/DC 24 V
for AC/DC 48 V2
for AC 110 ÷ 230 V
for DC 110 V
13.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (first circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
23.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (second circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
SP-BHD-X... undervoltage release - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
SV-BHD-X... shunt trip - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
F72
Modeion
G MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BL1000S
G
Modeion BL1000S
COMMERCIAL INFORMATION 3P
Switching units, withdrawable device .........................................................................................................................G4
Overcurrent releases ...............................................................................................................................................................G5
Signalling units ..........................................................................................................................................................................G5
Residual current monitor .....................................................................................................................................................H6
Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................H6
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................H7
Auxiliary switches .....................................................................................................................................................................H8
Shunt trips ....................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Undervoltage releases ...........................................................................................................................................................H8
Delay unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................H9
Hand drives ...................................................................................................................................................................................H9
Mechanical interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................H9
Motor drives .................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................H10
- specifications ........................................................................................................................................G6
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................H12
- connecting, mounting ........................................................................................................................H13
- deionization spaces ............................................................................................................................H16
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................H17
Withdrawable device
- description, specifications, diagram....................................................................................................H30
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications...................................................................................................................G7
MTV8 - motor
- description, specifications...................................................................................................................G8
U001 - universal
- description, specifications.................................................................................................................G10
Signalling units
Connecting sets
- specifications.......................................................................................................................................H13
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trips
Hand drives
- description, specifications...................................................................................................................H40
- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................H41
Motor drives
G2
BL1000S Commercial information Modeion
PROPERTIES OF BL1000 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Easy connection
Circuit breakers can be connected by means of busbars, flexibars and cables directly.

Local control
Black bearing.
Safe control from the front on the switchboard door.
Withdrawable design
A secure visible disconnection of the main circuit.
G3
Modeion BL1000S Commercial information
SWITCHING UNITS 3P
Fixed design
BL1000SE305 OEZ:19381 1 000 65 20 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page G6
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page H13 as well as deionization space, see page H16
- Switching unit: includes - insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02

- mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS01 (4x M8x80)
- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BL-J....-.... (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-J1000-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BL1000SE305
Withdrawable design
BL1000SE320 OEZ:19382 1 000 65 23 1
- Switching unit must be fitted with: - by overcurrent release SE-BL-J....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-J1000-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- withdrawable device ZV-BL-1600-300
BL1000SE320
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE

ZV-BL-1600-300 OEZ:21010 Withdrawable device 14 1
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H30
- Withdrawable device: must be fitted with - 2 connection sets CS-BL-A010 (front connection)
or CS-BL-A020 (rear connection)
we recommend fitting with - mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS02 (4x M8x60)
ZV-BL-1600-300
G4
315 SE-BL-J315-DTV3 OEZ:22111 IR setting = 125 ÷ 315 A 0.5 1
SE-BL-J800-DTV3 1 000 SE-BL-J1000-DTV3 OEZ:19383 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.5 1

315 SE-BL-J315-MTV8 OEZ:22101 IR setting = 125 ÷ 315 A 0.5 1
630 SE-BL-J630-MTV8 OEZ:22201 IR setting = 250 ÷ 630 A 0.5 1
SE-BL-J800-MTV8 800 SE-BL-J800-MTV8 OEZ:22301 IR setting = 315 ÷ 800 A 0.5 1
1 000 SE-BL-J1000-MTV8 OEZ:19384 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.5 1
U001 - characteristic U - universal

protection complicated loads or those not specified in advance
315 SE-BL-J315-U001 OEZ:20527 IR setting = 125 ÷ 315 A 0.5 1
SE-BL-J1000-U001 1 000 SE-BL-J1000-U001 OEZ:20524 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.5 1
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR UNIT 3P

1 000 SE-BL-J1000-V001 OEZ:19385 Switch-disconnector unit 0.4 1
SE-BL-J1000-V001
SIGNALLING UNIT 3P

SB-BL-0002 OEZ:13765 for overcurrent releases 0.67 1
DTV3, MTV8 and U001
- for connecting of circuit breaker with signalling unit CS-BL-B*** block terminals cannot be used
SB-BL-0002
G5
Modeion BL1000S Technical information

CIRCUIT SWITCH-
Specification BREAKERS DISCONNECTORS
Type BL1000S
Series SUPERIOR
Dimensions A x B x C + D 210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm 210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm
Weight 20 kg 20 kg
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 3 3
Rated current In 315, 630, 800, 1 000 A -
Rated normal current Iu 1 000 A 1 000 A
Rated operating current Ie - 1 000 A
- max. DC 440 V
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B AC-23B
Utilization category (switching mode) at Ie = 1 000 A AC 690 V - AC-23B
DC 440 V - DC-23B
Rated short-time withstand current at Icw / t 15 kA / 1 s 15 kA / 1 s
Ue = AC 690 V
65 kA / AC 415 V
-
45 kA / AC 500 V
20 kA / AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm / Ue 140 kA / AC 415 V 30 kA / AC 415 V
30 kA / DC 440 V
36 kA / AC 415 V
-
30 kA / AC 500 V
20 kA / AC 690 V
Losses per 1 pole fixed/withdrawable design 100 W / 139 W 100 W / 139 W
Switch-disconnector Mechanical endurance 10 000 cycles 10 000 cycles
Dimensions Working environment dry and tropical climate dry and tropical climate
Plug-in design – –
Withdrawable design z z
Mounting
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/z/–/– z/z/–/–
Shunt trip z z
Undervoltage release/with early switch z/– z/–
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for overcurrent release z/– z/–
LOAD 1)
In case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) icu does not change
Connection of switch-disconnector for DC circuits - protection of Modeion switch-disconnectors, see page R10
2)
Deionization spaces for application in IT network, see page R7
You can find some more technical information in chapter „BL1000S, BL1600S – Technical information“ (Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors - diagram, connecting, mounting, deionization spaces, dimensions ...)
G6
BL1000S Technical information Modeion
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - DTV3 3P

SE-BL-J315-DTV3 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
the overcurrent release indicates the value of the passing
In = 630 A current by means of LED
SE-BL-J630-DTV3
In = 800 A
SE-BL-J800-DTV3

In = 1 000 A Switching unit BL1000…
SE-BL-J1000-DTV3
Overcurrent release SE-BL-J…
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
G7
OVERCURRENT RELEASES- MTV8, TV mode 3P

SE-BL-J315-MTV8 transformers and generators
In = 630 A setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
SE-BL-J630-MTV8
current by means of LED
In = 800 A by the manufacturer to minimum
SE-BL-J800-MTV8

Switching unit BL1000…
In = 1 000 A Reduced current IR …. A
SE-BL-J1000-MTV8
Mode TV
t
IR
IMPORTANT
of failure
Ii
G8
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - MTV8, M mode 3P

SE-BL-J315-MTV8 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
In = 630 A setting of the value of short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
SE-BL-J630-MTV8
In = 800 A by the manufacturer to minimum
SE-BL-J800-MTV8

SE-BL-J1000-MTV8
Mode M
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
G9
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - U001 3P
Short-circuit
Rated current Motor starting Selective release release Properties
In = 315 A it is designed for demanding applications with a complicated
SE-BL-J315-U001 load and required high selectivity with fuses or circuit breakers
setting of the value of selective release tR in 8 steps, possibility
of setting of gradient of characteristic of the thermal release
I5t (adaptation of time-current characteristic of the fuse)
In = 630 A (independent time-delayed release)
SE-BL-J630-U001 setting of delay of the selective release tsd 50 to 1000 ms
including possibility of setting of a gradient of characteristic
of the short-circuit release (adaptation of the time-current
characteristic of the fuse)
setting of IR, tR, Isd, tsd and Ii by means of rotary switches is
stepwise
In = 800 A value of the passing current by means of LED
SE-BL-J800-U001 the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set
SE-BL-J1000-U001 Thermal memory T ….
Setting of the gradient of charac-
I5t ….
teristic of the thermal release
I2t ….
teristic of the short-circuit release
Short-circuit release value Ii …. A
t
IR
IMPORTANT
to achieve as high selectivity as possible, use
the possibility of setting of the current and
tR delay including gradient of the time-current
characteristic of the independent (short-circuit)
time-delayed release.
For selectivity solution, use the calculation program Sichr.
Isd ON I2t
tsd
Ii
2
OFF I t
G10
Modeion
H MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BL1600S
H
Modeion BL1600S
COMMERCIAL INFORMATION 3P
Switching units, withdrawable device .........................................................................................................................H4
Overcurrent releases ...............................................................................................................................................................H5
Signalling units ..........................................................................................................................................................................H5
Residual current monitor .....................................................................................................................................................H6
Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................H6
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................H7
Auxiliary switches .....................................................................................................................................................................H8
Shunt trips ....................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Undervoltage releases ...........................................................................................................................................................H8
Delay unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................H9
Hand drives ...................................................................................................................................................................................H9
Mechanical interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................H9
Motor drives .................................................................................................................................................................................H9
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................H10
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................H11
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................H12
- connecting, mounting ........................................................................................................................H13
- deionization spaces.............................................................................................................................H16
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................H17
Withdrawable device
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications ................................................................................................................H30
MTV8 - motor
U001 - universal
Signalling units
Connecting sets
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trips
Hand drives
- description, specifications...................................................................................................................H40
- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................H41
Motor drives
H2
PROPERTIES OF BL1600S CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Easy connection
Circuit breakers can be connected by means of busbars, flexibars and cables directly.

Local control
Black bearing.
Safe control from the front on the switchboard door.
Withdrawable design
A secure visible disconnection of the main circuit.
H3
Modeion BL1600S Commercial information
SWITCHING UNITS 3P
Fixed design
BL1600SE305 OEZ:14410 1 600 65 22 1
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page H13 as well as deionization space see page H16
- Switching unit: includes - insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02

- mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS01 (4x M8x80)
- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
must be fitted with - by overcurrent release SE-BL-....-.... (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-1600-V001 (switch-disconnector)
BH1600SE305
Withdrawable design
BL1600SE320 OEZ:21000 1 600 65 23 1
- Switching unit must be fitted with: - by overcurrent release SE-BL-....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-1600-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- withdrawable device ZV-BL-1600-300
BL1600SE320

ZV-BL-1600-300 OEZ:21010 Withdrawable device 14.3 1
- Withdrawable device must be fitted with - 2 connection sets CS-BL-A010 (front connection)
or CS-BL-A020 (rear connection)
we recommend fitting with - mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS02 (4x M8x60)
ZV-BL-1600-300
H4
630 SE-BL-0630-DTV3 OEZ:20070 IR setting = 250 ÷ 630 A 0.5 1
1 000 SE-BL-1000-DTV3 OEZ:20080 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.5 1
SE-BL-1600-DTV3

630 SE-BL-0630-MTV8 OEZ:20071 IR setting = 250 ÷ 630 A 0.5 1
1 000 SE-BL-1000-MTV8 OEZ:20081 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.5 1
SE-BL-1600-MTV8 1 250 SE-BL-1250-MTV8 OEZ:19389 IR setting = 500 ÷ 1 250 A 0.5 1
1 600 SE-BL-1600-MTV8 OEZ:20091 IR setting = 630 ÷ 1 600 A 0.5 1
U001 - characteristic U - universal

protection complicated loads or those not specified in advance
630 SE-BL-0630-U001 OEZ:20523 IR setting = 250 ÷ 630 A 0.59 1
1 000 SE-BL-1000-U001 OEZ:20364 IR setting = 400 ÷ 1 000 A 0.59 1
SE-BL-1600-U001
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR UNIT 3P

1 600 SE-BL-1600-V001 OEZ:20400 Switch-disconnector unit 0.4 1
SE-BL-1600-V001
SIGNALLING UNITS 3P
Type Product code Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]

SB-BL-0002 13765 - for overcurrent releases 0.67 1
DTV3, MTV8 and U001
- for connecting of circuit breaker with signalling unit CS-BL-B*** block terminals cannot be used
SB-BL-0002
H5
Modeion BL1000S, BL1600S Commercial information

5SV8000-6KK

5SV8001-6KK

5SV8706-0KK
H6
BL1000S, BL1600S Commercial information Modeion
CONNECTING SETS 3P
CS-BL-W010 OEZ:20710 Clamp terminals - 2x (70 ÷ 240) Cu/Al cables 1.47 1
double
CS-BL-W010 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H13
- for connection four 70 ÷ 240 mm2 cables per pole, it is possible to use two CS-BL-W010 connecting sets, see page H19 (not for BL1000SE305
switching unit)
-conductor cross-section for potential terminal is 2.5 mm2
CS-BL-W011 OEZ:20930 Clamp terminals 70 ÷ 240 Cu/Al cables 0.663 1
- for connection three 70 ÷ 240 mm2 cables per pole, it is possible to combine CS-BL-W011 connecting set with CS-BL-W010 connecting set,
see page H16, H19 (not for BL1000SE305 switching unit)
CS-BL-W011
CS-BL-A022 OEZ:20611 Rear connection - up to 1 000 A Cu/Al busbars 1.43 1

- for fixed design
CS-BL-A022
CS-BL-A021 OEZ:20610 Rear connection - up to 1 600 A Cu/Al busbars 2.76 1

- for fixed design
CS-BL-A021
CS-BL-A010 OEZ:21050 Front connection - for withdrawable design Cu/Al busbars 2.73 1
- set includes 6 interconnecting busbars / 2 busbars per pole
CS-BL-A010
CS-BL-A020 OEZ:21070 Rear connection - for withdrawable design Cu/Al busbars 3.42 1
CS-BL-A020
CS-BL-A015 OEZ:41469 Front connection Cu/Al busbars 4.5 1

- for fixed design, for BL1600
CS-BL-A015
CS-BL-A016 OEZ:41470 Front connection Cu/Al busbars 3.00 1

- for fixed design, for BL1000
CS-BL-A016
CS-BL-B002 OEZ:20116 Block terminal 150 ÷ 300 Cu/Al cables 1.00 1

- for 2 cables
- it is necessary to use insulating barriers
CS-BL-B002
- using the OD-BD-KS09 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled without the need to apply insulating barriers

- for 3 cables
CS-BL-B003 - using the OD-BD-KS09 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled without the need to apply insulating barriers

- for 4 cables
CS-BL-B004 - using the OD-BD-KS09 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled without the need to apply insulating barriers
1)
H7
AUXILIARY SWITCHES 3P
PS-BL-2200 OEZ:20510 AC 60 ÷ 500 V / DC 60 ÷ 240 V 0.041 1
PS-BL-2200-Au OEZ:12808 AC/DC 5 ÷ 60 V 0.041 1
PS-BL-2200
SHUNT TRIPS 3P

SV-BL-X024 OEZ:16162 AC/DC 24 V 0.22 1
SV-BL-X048 OEZ:16161 AC/DC 48 V 0.22 1
SV-BL-X110 OEZ:16160 AC/DC 110 V 0.22 1
SV-BL-X230 OEZ:16159 AC 230 V / DC 220 V 0.22 1
SV-BL-X230
SV-BL-X400 OEZ:16158 AC 400 V 0.22 1
SV-BL-X500 OEZ:16157 AC 500 V 0.22 1
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES 3P

SP-BL-X024 OEZ:16168 AC/DC 24 V 0.22 1
SP-BL-X048 OEZ:16167 AC/DC 48 V 0.22 1
SP-BL-X110 OEZ:16166 AC/DC 110 V 0.22 1
SP-BL-X230 OEZ:16165 AC 230 V / DC 220 V 0.22 1
SP-BL-X230
SP-BL-X400 OEZ:16164 AC 400 V 0.22 1
SP-BL-X500 OEZ:16163 AC 500 V 0.22 1
DELAY UNIT

BZ-BX-X230-A OEZ:36696 Enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers 0.12 1
Modeion
BZ-BX-X230-A
H8
BL1000S, BL1600S Commercial information Modeion
HAND DRIVES 3P

RP-BL-CK10 OEZ:20850 Hand drive unit - with locking 0.23 1
RP-BL-CK52 OEZ:20678 Hand drive unit, 2 pcs, with the same lock and key 0.46 1
RP-BL-CK10 RP-BL-CK55 OEZ:20681 Hand drive unit, 5 pcs, with the same lock and key 1.15 1
Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on circuit breaker - with the black hand drive lever RP-BL-CP
for control through the switchboard door - with the extension shaft RP-BL-CH10
- with the hand drive bearing RP-BL-CN..
- with the hand drive lever RP-BL-CP..
RP-BL-CP10 OEZ:20865 Hand drive lever - black - with locking 0.261 1

RP-BL-CP11 OEZ:20867 Hand drive lever - red - with locking 0.261 1
RP-BL-CP10
RP-BL-CN10 OEZ:20870 Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP44 1.1 1

RP-BL-CN20 OEZ:19103 Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP66 1.1 1

RP-BL-CN10 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H40
RP-BL-CH10 OEZ:20875 Extension shaft - length 319 mm 0.352 1

RP-BL-CH10
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING 3P
For hand drive
RP-BL-CB10 OEZ:20880 For circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in fixed design 0.12 1
RP-BL-CB10 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H41

- Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever)
With Bowden cable
MB-BL-PP07 OEZ:19807 For circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in fixed design 0.4 1
MB-BL-PV08 OEZ:20529 For one fixed and one withdrawable circuit 0.4 1
breaker/switch-disconnector
MB-BL-VV06 OEZ:20528 For circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in withdrawable design 0.4 1
MB-BL-PP07
MOTOR DRIVES 3P
MP-BL-X110 OEZ:11601 Motor drive AC/DC 110 V 4.35 1
MP-BL-X230 OEZ:11600 Motor drive AC 230 V / DC 220 V 4.35 1
MP-BL-X110-P OEZ:11604 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC/DC 110 V 4.4 1
MP-BL-X230-P OEZ:11605 Motor drive - with counter of cycles AC 230 V / DC 220 V 4.4 1
MP-BL-X230
H9
ACCESSORIES 3P

OD-BL-KS02 OEZ:20910 Insulating barriers - for switching unit in fixed design 0.264 1
- in case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), must be installed also on lower side
- included with each switching unit order in fixed design
OD-BL-KS02
OD-BL-KS08 OEZ:20569 Insulating barriers - for withdrawable device 0.142 1

- must always be installed on withdrawable device when clamp or block type terminals are used for its connection
OD-BL-KS08
OD-BL-KS09 OEZ:39893 Terminal cover – degree of protection IP20 0.7 1

- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using CS-BL-B002, CS-BL-B003, CS-BL-B004 block type terminals
- it is intended for fi xed design
OD-BL-KS09
OD-BL-KS01 OEZ:20810 Terminal cover - for circuit breaker/switch-disconnector 0.287 1
in fi xed design with rear connection
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20
OD-BL-KS01
OD-BL-KS04 OEZ:20940 Terminal cover - for withdrawable device with front 0.168 1
connection
- intended for withdrawable device with front connection
OD-BL-KS04 - we recommend its installation on both sides of withdrawable device for increasing safety in servicing electrical device
OD-BL-KS03 OEZ:20920 Insulating grommets - for rear connection 0.1 1

- are intended for fixed design of switching unit and withdrawable device with rear connection
OD-BL-KS03 - insulate connecting sets of rear connection from switchboard structure
- we recommend installing on all connecting sets with rear connection
- set (3 pieces)
OD-BL-UP01 OEZ:13621 Lever with locking 0.041 1
- enables to lock the lever of circuit breaker in „switched off manually“ position (loaded)
- locking is possible using up to three padlocks with max. shank diameter 4 ÷ 6 mm
OD-BL-UP01
OD-BL-VP01 OEZ:13924 Bolt sealing insert 0.003 2

enables sealing for: - overcurrent release
- cover of cavities
OD-BL-VP01
OD-BL-KA01 OEZ:21030 Connecting cable - for connecting circuit breaker 0.12 1

accessories in withdrawable design - 15 wires
OD-BL-KA01
SO-BL-0010 OEZ:21020 Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker/switch- 0.02 1

-disconnector position in withdrawable design
SO-BL-0010 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H28
OD-BL-MS02 OEZ:14855 Mounting bolts set - for withdrawable device 0.144 1

- bolts M8x60
OD-BL-MS02
OD-BL-KT01 OEZ:14643 Cover of switch on button - for motor drive, cover can be sealed 0.019 1
OD-BL-KT01
H10
CIRCUIT SWITCH-
Specifications BREAKERS DISCONNECTORS
Type BL1600S
Series SUPERIOR
Dimensions A x B x C + D 210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm 210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm
Weight 22 kg 22 kg
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 3 3
Rated current In 630, 1 000, 1 250, 1 600 A -
Rated normal current Iu 1 600 A 1 600 A
Rated operating current Ie - 1 600 A
- max. DC 440 V
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B -
DC 440 V - DC-23B
Rated short-time withstand current at Icw / t 20 kA / 1 s 20 kA / 1 s
Ue = AC 690 V
65 kA / AC 415 V
-
45 kA / AC 500 V
20 kA / AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm / Ue 140 kA / AC 415 V 40 kA / AC 415 V
40 kA / DC 440 V
36 kA / AC 415 V
-
30 kA / AC 500 V
20 kA / AC 690 V
Losses per 1 pole fixed/withdrawable design 120 W / 300 W 120 W / 300 W
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Mounting Plug-in design – –

Withdrawable design z z
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/z/–/– z/z/–/–
Shunt trip z z
Undervoltage release/with early switch z/– z/–

Mechanical interlocking - with Bowden cable/for hand drive z/z z/z
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for overcurrent release z/– z/–

LOAD
In case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change
2)
Deionization spaces for application in IT network, see page R8
H11
Control
Ovládací circuit
obvod of motor drive
motorového pohonu
Q3
H12
L+
Diagram
ON
Výsuvné zařízenídevice Connecting cable
Propojovací kabel
2 4 1 1 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Modeion
OFF SO1
B
ZV-BL X2
Circuit breaker with accessories
Motor drive
Motorový pohon Pomocné releases
Auxiliary spouště Main circuit
Hlavní obvod Switches
Spínače
auxiliary
pomocné auxiliary
pomocné relative
relativní relative
relativní
D1 C1 1 3 5
3.13
3.21
3.31
3.43
1.13
1.21
1.31
1.43
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
2.13
2.21
2.31
2.43
5 7 3 4 1 9
X3 SE-BL
NC NO
SSI
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
BL1000S, BL1600S
SP-BL-X...
SV-BL-X...
or Q
V
M P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS
T1
TEST T2
MP T3
6 2 10
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
X3 J D2 C2 2 4 6
cavity
dutina 5
No.č.5 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.11 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.22 cavity
dutinuNo.
č.33 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.44
N-
SO2
ZV-BL X1
Technical information
1 4 2 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Withdrawable device
Výsuvné zařízení Connecting cable
Propojovací kabel
MP motor drive - MP-BL-X... J switching unit - BL1000SE305, BL1600SE305 SP-BL-X... undervoltage release
M motor Q main contacts SV-BL-X... shunt trip
P storage device T1, T2, T3 current transformers
X3 connector for connection of control circuits V trip-free mechanism
SSI switch to indicate MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C)
SE-BL overcurrent release - SE-BL-J...-...., SE-BL-....-....
- it is not a part of motor drive ZV-BL withdrawable device - ZV-BL-1600-300
ON switch off button X1, X2 connecting cable for withdrawable device - OD-BL-KA01
OFF switch off button SO1, SO2 contacts signalling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector position
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker, see page H43 in withdrawable device - SO-BL-0010 - for more detailed
information see page H30
3P
BL1000S, BL1600S Technical information Modeion

Power circuit Recommended min. cross-section of cables and busbars (flexibars) for fixed and withdrawable design
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly Cables S [mm2] Busbars W x H [mm]
cables with cable lugs IR (In) [A]
Cu Al Cu Al
250 120 150
connection sets are produced to provide greater con-
400 185 240
necting options see page H7
500 2x 150 2 x 185
generally, conductors from the supply are connected 630 2x 185 2 x 240
to input terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to 800 2x 240 3 x 240 50 x 10; 2x 50 x 5 2x 50 x 8
terminals 2, 4, 6; however, it is possible to reverse the con- 1 000 2x 240 3 x 240 2x 50 x 6 2x 50 x 10
nection (exchanging input and output terminals without
1 300 3x 240 4 x 240 2x 50 x 10
limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
1 500 (1 450) 1) 4x 240
in case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/ 1 600 (1 450) 1) 2x 50 x 101)
/switch-disconnector must be fitted with ODBL- 1)
Withdrawable device connected by 2x (50 x 10 mm) Cu busbars can be loaded with max. 1 450 A. For 1 600 A loading, the withdrawable device
KS02 insulating barriers also on the side of must be connected with 2x (50 x 12 mm) or 2x (60 x 10 mm) busbar with use of insulating barriers.
terminals 2, 4, 6, for more detailed information see - it is necessary to follow the relevant valid standards when cables are designed
Mechanical reinforcement of conductors
page H16 Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads for BL1000, BL1600
in accordance with ambient temperature
we recommend painting the connecting busbars
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BL1000S
input and output conductors/busbars must - connection by Cu busbars 2x 50 x 6 mm per pole
Ik ≤ 25 kA
be mechanically reinforced to avoid transfer- 50 oC 55 oC 60 oC 65 oC 70 oC
ring electrodynamic force to the circuit breaker/ 1 000 A 1 000 A 940 A 870 A 800 A
/switch-disconnector during short-circuiting
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BL1600S Ik ≤ 65 kA
- connection by Cu busbars 2x 50 x 10 mm per pole
the method of connecting the power circuit
must observe the deionization space of the circuit 50 oC 55 oC 60 oC 65 oC 70 oC
breaker/ switch-disconnector, see page H16 1 400 A 1 300 A 1 200 A 1 100 A 1 000 A
Auxiliary circuits
switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are
connected using flexible Cu conductors with cross-sec-
tion 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 directly to terminals on these devices
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or

withdrawable design are connected using a connector
Connecting set specification


lugs W x H [mm] drawing
CS-BL-W010 800 2x (70 ÷ 240) Cu/Al 2x (95 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 2x (50 ÷ 185) Cu/Al 2x (70 ÷ 240) Cu/Al page H18, H25
CS-BL-W011 500 70 ÷ 240 Cu/Al 95 ÷ 300 Cu/Al 50 ÷ 185 Cu/Al 70 ÷ 240 Cu/Al page H18, H26
CS-BL-B002 1 000 2x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 2x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 2x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 2x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al page H19
CS-BL-B003 1 500 3x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 3x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 3x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 3x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al page H19, H26
CS-BL-B004 1 600 4x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 4x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 4x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al 4x (150 ÷ 300) Cu/Al page H20, H27
CS-BL-A022 1 000 50 x ... page H17/H27
CS-BL-A021 1 600 50 x ... page H17
CS-BL-A010 1 600 50 x ... page H24
CS-BL-A020 1 600 50 x ... page H25
CS-BL-A015 1 600 50 x ... page H20
CS-BL-A016 1 000 50 x ... page H21
H13
Modeion BL1000S, BL1600S Technical information
Front connection - busbars Rear connection
CS-BL-A021
OD-BL-KS03
OD-BL-KS01
10 Nm
25 Nm CS-BL-A021
F F OD-BL-KS03
F F
OD-BL-KS02
F F OD-BL-KS01
Front connection - busbars Front connection - busbars
CS-BL-A016
CS-BL-A015 OD-BL-KS02
OD-BL-KS02
BL1000SE305
BL1600SE305
M10x55 M10x55
CS-BL-A015 CS-BL-A016
25Nm 25Nm
H14
Front connection - 2 Cu, Al cables Front connection - 3 Cu, Al cables (not for BL1000SE305 switching unit)
CS-BL-W010
CS-BL-W011
CS-BL-W010
25 Nm
25 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
F F
OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-W010 F F
F F CS-BL-W010
22 ÷ 25 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-W011
Front connection - cables F F
2 Cu/Al cables - connecting sets CS-BL-B002 22 ÷ 25 Nm
3 Cu/Al cables - connecting sets CS-BL-B003
4 Cu/Al cables - connecting sets CS-BL-B004 OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-B00.
nebo BL....SE305
OD-BL-KS02 OD-BL-KS09
CS-BL-B00.
25 Nm
OD-BL-KS09 30 Nm
OD-BL-KS02 . ÷ 4 mm2 Cu..0,8

1,5 0.8 Nm
. Nm
6 mm2 Cu..1,0
nebo
H15
Deionization spaces
Minimum deionization space free of earthed metal parts

OD-BL-KS02
50 210 50 210 50
20
134,5
C=134.5 40
200
200
350
100
Applicable for operational voltage Ue ≤ AC/DC 690 V (DC only for switch-disconnector)
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection - terminals 1, 3, 5 - OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
(upper side)
- terminals 2, 4, 6 a) if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals 2, 4, 6,

(lower side) OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on it
b) if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected on lower side using clamp or block
type terminals, OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on it
- rear connection - terminals 1, 3, 5 - OD-BL-KS01 insulating cover or OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed
(upper side) on circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
- we recommend installing OD-BL-KS03 insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection
- terminals 2, 4, 6 - if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals 2, 4, 6,

(lower side) OD-BL-KS01 insulation cover must always be installed on it
- we recommend installing OD-BL-KS03 insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection
WITHDRAWABLE DESIGN
- front connection - terminals 1, 3, 5 - withdrawable device is connected on upper side using clamp or block type terminals,
(upper side) OD-BL-KS08 insulating barriers must always be installed – in all other cases, we recommend
installing OD-BL-KS04 insulating cover on upper side of the device
- terminals 2, 4, 6 - if withdrawable device is connected on lower side using clamp or block type terminals,
(lower side) OD-BL-KS08 insulating barriers must always be installed – in all other cases, we recommend
installing OD-BL-KS04 insulating cover on lower side of withdrawable device
H16
Dimensions
142.5
142,5
70 70 134.5
134,5 8 BL1000S
3 35.5
35,5 16 BL1600S
200
M8
148
72
15°
350
494
300
314
7°
56.5
100
56,5
240
51
21°
148
ø9
80 x
4
18
72
35.5
35,5 16 70 70
50
210 134.5
134,5
157 7
Connecting busbar modification

10.5
4 x ø10,5
12.5
12,5
50
+1
25 0
+1
25 0
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BL-A021, CS-BL-A022 connecting sets) Openings for insulation grommets
200
70 70 84.5
84,5 142.5
142,5
60
16
R4
BL1000S 8
BL1600S
356
444
510
436
50
60
82
H17
Dimensions
Fixed design, clamp terminals (CS-BL-W010 connecting sets) - combination of two sets arranged vertically can not be applied for BL1000SE305 switching unit
250
3
134.5
134,5
200
750
350
627
Another possibility of connection

138.5
138,5
80 23
133
Fixed design, clamp terminals (CS-BL-W010 and CS-BL-W011 connecting sets) - combination of two sets arranged vertically can not be applied for BL1000SE305 switching unit
250
3
134.5
134,5
200
750
350
627
138,5
138.5
80 136
H18
Dimensions
Fixed design, block terminals (CS-BL-B002)

134.5
134,5
52.5
52,5
205 35.5
35,5
70
116
116
210
582
542
469
419
350
314
678
350
164
65
26
75.5
75,5

134,5
134.5
52,5
52.5 32
205 35,5
35.5
70
138
210
626
596
537
469
419
350
314
678
350
164
65 26 26
107,5
107.5
H19
Dimensions
134.5
134,5
52.5
52,5 32
205 35.5
35,5
70
138
210
626
596
537
469
419
350
314
678
350
164
65 26 26
107.5
107,5
Fixed design, CS-BL-A015 front connection

250
100 100 35,5 1616
35.5
3
50 26
26
103
200.2
200,2
72
700
350
350
H20
Dimensions
Fixed design, CS-BL-A016 front connection
250
100 100 35.5
35,5 88
3
50 26
26
102,9
102.9
200.2
200,2
72
350
700
350
Fixed design, front hand drive Hand drive lever - with locking (RP-BL-CP10, RP-BL-CP11)
46
RP-BL-CK10
28°
RP-BL-CP..
72
12°
72
148
R1
60
40°
196 50
H21
Dimensions
Fixed design, front hand drive, adjustable lever Switchboard door modification
46
BL...
RP-BL-CK10
RP-BL-CH10
RP-BL-CN..
min. 200
RP-BL-CP.. ø40
90
44xø5.4
x ø5,4
28 28
28 28
19.5 50 Switchboard
Závěs door hinge
dveří rozváděče
198 SWITCHBOARD PANEL

90
min. 267
max. 500
RP-BL-CB10 mechanical interlocking Switchboard door modification
min. 200 260

2 x ø40
88xø5.4
x ø5,4
28 28
314
28 28
Switchboard
Závěs door hinge
dveří rozváděče
ø9
x
4
50 70 190 70
H22
Dimensions
Fixed design, MP-BL-X... motor drive Locking using three padlocks
8
33 R8
114
235
134.5
134,5 73
268.5
268,5
Fixed design, SB-BL-0002 signalling unit

417
31
142.5
142,5
H23
Dimensions
ZV-BL-1600-300 withdrawable device Drilling diagram
292 ø9
x
4
9
xø
4
MAX 140
350
180
100
314
508
125
18
75 140 35 70 70
210
248 174
Withdrawable device, front connection (CS-BL-A010 connecting sets)
70 70
4 x M8
33.5
33,5
350
494
33.5
33,5
72
27.5
27,5 16
50
H24
Dimensions
Withdrawable device, rear connection (CS-BL-A021 connecting set) Drilling diagram
106.5
106,5
9
xø
4
16
MAX 140
230
100
50
125
140 35
Withdrawable device, clamp terminals (CS-BL-W010 connecting set)
250
350
627
138.5
138,5
31
80 133
H25
Dimensions
Withdrawable device, clamp terminals (CS-BL-W010 and CS-BL-W011 connecting sets)
250
350
627
138.5
138,5
128
80
Withdrawable device, block terminals Working position
137
205 45
3 28
200
582
750
350
116
65 ø26
68
H26
Dimensions
Withdrawable device, block terminals (CS-BL-B003)

137
205 45 32
3 28
750
350
626
138
65
ø26 ø26
100
Withdrawable device, block terminals (CS-BL-B004)

137
205 45 32
3 28
750
350
626
138
65
ø26 ø26
100
H27
Dimensions
292 295 340

65
350
180
508
210 75 75 45
248 174 174

239 284
H28
Dimensions
321 366
271 316
Withdrawable design, MP-BL-X230 motor drive Working position Inspection position
343.5
343,5 33 388.5
388,5 33
282.5
282,5 327.5
327,5
H29
Description
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector Signalling of position SO-BL-0010
is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid Withdrawable device can be fitted with up to four switches for
exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent checking and both signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted, see table.
visual and conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
withdrawable device must be fitted with connecting the sets: Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
2 sets CS-BL-A010 - pro front connection remote signalling of circuit breaker`s inserted position (po-
or 2 sets CS-BL-A020 - for rear connection sition of locking is not signalled)
checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
OD-BL-MS02 set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the inspection position
withdrawable device into the switchboard, see page H10 locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker,
locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking) position –
Circuit breaker positions locking by means of padlocks
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions: visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
ZV-BL-1600-300 1. inserted (working position) easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
2. withdrawn (inspection position)
3. removed
Power circuit
connecting set CS-BL-A010 is used for connecting with
busbars or cable lugs (front connection) or CS-BL-A020
connecting set (rear connection)
for connection using cables, it is necessary in addition to a
connection set CS-BL-A010 or CS-BL-A020 to use connec-
tion sets, see page H7
the method of power circuit connection must observe
recommendations, see page H12, as well as deionization
space, see page H16
OD-BL-KA01
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire cable OD-BL-KA01.
Circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design

Circuit breaker in withdrawable design
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has the same
accessories as fixed circuit breaker.
SO-BL-0010
States of switches SO-BL-0010 in withdrawable device

according to circuit breaker and arrestment positions
Circuit breaker position State of switch
1
2 4
Inserted (arrested and not arrested) 0 1

Other positions 1 0
SO-BL-0010 Specifications SO-BL-0010

Type SO-BL-0010
Rated operating voltage AC 230 V
Ue
DC 220 V
Rated operating current Ie /Ue AC-13 6 A / AC 230 V
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories, see page H12
H30
Recommended connection of circuit breaker Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker with motor drive
in withdrawable design with motor drive - each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker we rec-
ommend at first to run the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motor drive
to the MANUAL position
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive - more operating information can be found in the operating instructions
Q3 - in case of infringement of this procedure or failing to follow the
L+
recommended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully switch on at the first attempt
ON
MANUA
MANUAL
OFF AU TO
B
Motorový pohon
Motor drive Spínače
Switches
relativní
relative
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design with motor drive Diagram description
5 7 3 4 1 9
X3
Symbol Description
MP motor drive MP-BL-X...
M motor
P storage device
PS-BL-2200
NC NO X3 connector for connection of control circuits
SSI SSI switch to indicate MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C)
C
M P (not included in motor drive order)
ON switch on button
MP Q3 motor drive circuit breaker for AC 110 V LTN-4C-1
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
6 2 10
X3 for DC 220 V LTN-UC-2C-1
cavity
dutina
dutina No
č.4č. 4.4
N-
State of circuit breaker after insertion/
State of circuit breaker before insertion/withdrawal
/withdrawal
State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion
State of circuit breaker before insertion
- withdrawn position - inserted position
State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after
State of circuit breaker before withdrawal
- inserted position withdrawal - withdrawn position
Cavity 1, 2 3, 4 1, 2 3, 4
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off from switched on state:
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
by the releases or TEST push buttton
H31
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - DTV3 3P

SE-BL-0630-DTV3 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
In = 1 000 A current by means of LED
SE-BL-1000-DTV3
In = 1 250 A
SE-BL-1250-DTV3

In = 1 600 A Switching unit BL1600…
SE-BL-1600-DTV3
Overcurrent release SE-BL-…
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
H32
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - MTV8, TV mode 3P

SE-BL-0630-MTV8 transformers and generators
In = 1 000 A setting of the value of the short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
SE-BL-1000-MTV8
In = 1 250 A
SE-BL-1250-MTV8

In = 1 600 A Overcurrent release setting
SE-BL-1600-MTV8
Mode TV
t
IR
IMPORTANT
of failure
Ii
H33
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - MTV8, M mode 3P

SE-BL-0630-MTV8 protects against both overcurrent and short circuit
In = 1 000 A setting of the value of the short-circuit release Ii in 8 steps
SE-BL-1000-MTV8
In = 1 250 A
SE-BL-1250-MTV8

In = 1 600 A Overcurrent release setting
SE-BL-1600-MTV8
Mode M
t
IR
IMPORTANT
Ii
H34
OVERCURRENT RELEASES - U001 3P
Short-circuit
Rated current Motor starting Selective release release Properties
In = 600 A it is designed for demanding applications with a complicated
SE-BL-600-U001 load and required high selectivity with fuses or circuit breakers
setting of the value of selective release tR in 8 steps, possibility
of setting of gradient of characteristic of the thermal release I5t
(adaptation of time-current characteristic of the fuse)
In = 1 000 A (independent time-delayed release)
SE-BL-1000-U001 setting of delay of the selective release tsd 50 to 1000 ms
including possibility of setting of a gradient of characteristic
of the short-circuit release (adaptation of the time-current
characteristic of the fuse)
setting of IR, tR, Isd, tsd and Ii by means of rotary switches is
stepwise
In = 1 250 A value of the passing current by means of LED
SE-BL-1250-U001 the values of parameters of the overcurrent release are set
SE-BL-1600-U001 Thermal memory T ….
I5t ….
teristic of the thermal release
I2t ….
teristic of the short-circuit release
Short-circuit release value Ii …. A
t
IR
IMPORTANT
to achieve as high selectivity as possible, use
the possibility of setting of the current and
tR delay including gradient of the time-current
characteristic of the independent (short-circuit)
time-delayed release.
For selectivity solution, use the calculation program Sichr.
Isd ON I2t
tsd
Ii
2
OFF I t
H35
SIGNALLING UNITS 3P
Description
the SB-BL-0002 signalling unit is a modular accessory for the remote indication on the state of the circuit breaker and
BL1000S and BL1600S circuit breakers and collaborates with the protected circuitry is ensured by a relay, the make and
the electronic releases SE-BL-.…-DTV3, SE-BL-.…-MTV8 and break contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip
SE-BL-....-U001 on the unit
it is intended for applications in automated-control systems - relays to indicate tripping of dependent or undercurrent
the unit signals reaching a certain current value in a circuit and independent releases have storage - they do not
SB-BL-0002 and the tripping of the circuit breaker by releases (dependent, change their state after disconnection from supply voltage
independent, undercurrent) - after the storage relay is activated by tripping of a release,
- user has an option to set up (by steps, using a rotary switch) it is necessary to reset the relay using the front panel RE-
an amount of currenthe wishes to indicate if it has been SET switch or by an external push button remotely - reset
reached is functional in case the supply voltage is connected to the
- can be set 70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160 or 180 % IR (for signalling block
more details see table) supply voltage values are given in the table
local indication regarding the state of the circuit breaker the main power supply and the reset circuit are not
and the protected circuitry is carried out by LED indicators concurrently conformable with conditions for safe
on the front panel of the unit separation of the circuits
the information on the state of the circuit breaker is the external RESET push button must be connected using
transferred from the release to the signalling unit by means a screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum resistence
of optical coupling of the loop 100 Ohm
The signalling unit will not work without power supply!
Specifications
Type SB-BL-0002
Rated operating voltage Ue AC/DC 12 ÷ 230 V
Short-circuit protection tube fuse T1,6 A
Current consumption (rms) max. at Ue AC/DC 12 V 370 mA
AC/DC 24 V 170 mA
AC/DC 48 V 100 mA
AC/DC 110 V 60 mA
AC 230 V / DC 220 V 50 mA
Rated operating current (of relay contact) Ie /Ue AC-1 8 A / AC 230 V
Ie /Ue DC-1 0.25 A / DC 220 V, 8 A / DC 30 V
DIMENSIONS see page H23 Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
Ambient temperature range -25 ÷ +55 °C
Power circuit status indication

Signalling Relay contacts LED
< 70 % IR – +
110 % IR + +
Reaching
70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180 – +
Settings + +
By dependent/undercurrent + +/+
Tripping by release
Independent + +
Connection
1,2 - supply
6,7 - external RESET push button
9,10,11 - relay contacts indicating preset IR
12,13,14 - relay contacts indicating reaching 110 % IR
15,16,17 - relay contacts indicating tripping by dependent or undercurrent releases
18,19,20 - relay contacts indicating tripping by independent release (instantaneous or delayed ones)
H36
AUXILIARY SWITCHES 3P
Specifications
Type PS-BL-2200 PS-BL-2200-Au 1)
DC 60 ÷ 240 V DC 5 ÷ 60 V
Rated operating current Ie /Ue AC-15 6 A/60 V ÷ 240 V, 3 A/400 V, 1.5 A/500 V AC-12, DC-12 0.004 ÷ 0.5 A/5 V,
Ie /Ue DC-13 1 A/60 V, 0.7 A/110 V, 0.3 A/240 V 0.004 ÷ 0.01/60 V
Thermal current Ith 6A 0.5 A
Arrangement of contacts 22 22
PS-BL-2200 Connection cross-section S 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2 0.5 ÷ 1 mm2
(connected switch)
1)
PS-BL-....- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types

22 2+2 break + make
Names and functions of switches according to their location in cavities

Cavity 3, 4 Relative switch to indicate tripping of the circuit breaker by releases, TEST push button or by motor
Cavity 1, 2 Auxiliary switch signals position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector’s main contacts
Spínače
Switches
Cavities in switching unit pomocné
auxiliary pomocné
auxiliary relativní
relative relativní
relative
BL1000SE305
3.13
3.21
3.31
3.43
1.13
1.21
1.31
1.43
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
2.13
2.21
2.31
2.43
BL1600SE305
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
cavity
dutinaNo.
č.11 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.22 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.33 cavity
dutinaNo.
č.44

Cavity 1, 2 3, 4
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
State
of circuit breaker
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Switched off from switched on state: by the

releases or TEST push buttton
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
H37
SHUNT TRIPS 3P
Specifications
Type SV-BL-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue < 2.5 VA
SV-BL-X230 <2W
Loading time ∞

Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
30
1.44
3.4 1.43
3.3 1
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13 0
2.44 2.43 Auxiliary switch
30
1.32
14 1.31
13 1
Cavities in switching unit 1.22
2.22
1.21
2.21 0
BL1000SE305 2.32 2.31 Relative switch
BL1600SE305 30
3.44 3.43 1
3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13 0
4.44 4.43 Relative switch
L+
30
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22 4.21 0
4.32 4.31
C1
SV-BL-X...
1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
50
t [ms]
Reaction time of the shunt trip States and positions

of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever
States of circuit Lever position of circuit
C2
SV
1 breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector
0
>50 Switched on
N-
1
0
OK Switched off by releases
or by TEST push button
t (ms)
It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the circuit
breaker is done by motor drive and shunt trip at once. The fol-
lowing time delays have to be kept between the disconnection Symbol Description
of voltage from the shunt trip and the control impulse for switch HK Main contacts
on of the motor drive: OK Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
HK 1 SV Control voltage on the shunt trip
0
70
1
SV
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 1 500
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)
H38
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES 3P
Specifications
Type SP-BL-X…
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 48, 110, 220 V
Input power at 1.1 Ue < 2.5 VA
SP-BL-X230 <2W
Characteristic 1) U ≥ 0.85 Ue it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
U ≤ 0.35 Ue the circuit breaker must trip
Loading time ∞
1)
Tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, see page P2
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching off by undervoltage release
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
30
1.44
3.4 1.43
3.3 1
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13 0
2.44 2.43 Auxiliary switch
Cavities in switching unit 30

1.32
14 1.31
13 1
BL1000SE305 1.22 1.21
0
BL1600SE305 2.22
2.32
2.21
2.31 Relative switch
30
3.44 3.43 1
3.14 3.13
L+ 4.14 4.13 0
30
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
D1
4.22 4.21 0
4.32 4.31
SP-BL-X...
1 5
10 3
4
10 2
10
50
00
10
50
50
t [ms]
Reaction time of the undervoltage release States and positions

of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever
D2

SP
1 breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector
0
N- >50 Switched on
1
0
OK
OK Switched off by releases
or by TEST push button
t (ms)
It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the cir-
cuit breaker is done by motor drive and undervoltage release
at once. The following time delays have to be kept between Symbol Description
bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the con- HK Main contacts
trol impulse for switch on of the motor drive: OK Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
HK 1 SP Control voltage on the undervoltage release
0
70
1
SP
0
>50
20 ÷ 1 500
1
IMP ON
0
t (ms)
H39
HAND DRIVES 3P
Description
The hand drive is the accessory of the circuit breaker/
/switch-disconnector which enable circuit breakers BL800S
and BL1600S to be controlled locally by applying rotary
movement on the lever, e.g. for switching electrical equip-
ment on and off. Modular conception of the drives enables
simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit break-
er cover of cavities is removed. The drive and its accessories
RP-BL-CK10 + RP-BL-CP10
are ordered separately according to your choice, see page H9.
Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page H21
The hand drive enables to control the circuit breaker

through the front panel or through the switchboard door,
the outlet for the operating shaft has the IP44 or IP66 de-
gree of protection for bearings.
Hand drive control lever can be fitted with an extension
shaft which makes possible to control the circuit breaker
also in deeper switchboards.
RP-BL-CK10 + RP-BL-CH10 + RP-BL-CN10 + RP-BL-CP10 In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical
equipment, the mechanism of the drive is furnished with
locking system preventing the switchboard door from
opening when the circuit breaker is in closed position.
When the circuit breaker is in position for manual open, the
drive handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder
type lock (FAB) and as many as three padlocks with shank
diameter up to 6+8 mm.
When the drive lever is in position manual open, it is pos- Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS see page H22
sible to remove the handle.
The circuit breaker with hand drives can be fitted with me-
chanical interlocking system, see page H41.
Specification
Type Description Colour Locking while the circuit breaker is in OFF state Degree of protection switched on or off by release Length [mm]
RP-BL-CK10 Hand drive unit - yes - - -
RP-BL-CP10 Hand drive lever black yes - - -
RP-BL-CP11 Hand drive lever red yes - - -
RP-BL-CN10 Hand drive bearing - - IP44 yes -
RP-BL-CN20 Hand drive bearing - - IP66 yes -
RP-BL-CH10 Extension shaft - - - - 319
H40
RP-BL-CB10 Mechanical interlocking
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers breaker. Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a hand
so that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but drive (at least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever)
only one of them at a time. see page H40. In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely
RP-BL-CB10 Interlocking can be used between two BL1000S or BL1600S necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown in
circuit breakers or between a BL1000S and BL1600S circuit Fig. 1 and 2.
314
ø9
x
4
50 70 190 70
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
MB-BL-PP07 Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable

Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers with a hand or motor drive. In order to use the interlocking,
so that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions that
only one of them at a time. are shown on page H42. Mechanical interlocking allows to be
Interlocking can be used between two BL1000S or BL1600S switched on of the first circuit breaker and loaded position of
circuit breakers or between a BL1000S and BL1600S circuit the second circuit breaker.
MB-BL-PP07 breaker. For interlocking, circuit breakers can be equipped
Type of mechanical Combination of circuit
interlocking breaker/switch-disconnector designs
MB-BL-PP07 fixed - fixed
MB-BL-PV08 fixed - withdrawable
MB-BL-VV06 withdrawable - withdrawable
Fig. 3 - Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable between fixed and withdrawable BL circuit breakers
H41
Mechanical interlocking - option for locating the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
140
130 ,.33
ø2
125,9
125.9
47
Rmin=75 Rmin=75
72.5
72,5
31
X
Combination of circuit breakers Distance between the circuit breakers

designs X [mm] 1)
fixed - fixed 100 ÷ 1 450
fixed - withdrawable 50 ÷ 1 400
withdrawable - withdrawable 50 ÷ 1 350
1)
TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see Instruction for use
H42
MOTOR DRIVES 3P
Description
It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch The presence of control voltage Ue is signalled by green LED
OFF/ON). If the circuit breaker is not stored by motor drive until
Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit 30 s., e.g. due to undervoltage, extremely low tempera-
breaker cover of cavities is removed. ture, mechanical or electrical failure, the LED diode on
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand the front panel is shining in red. During the lighting of
by units, synchronization of two sources or wherever the the red LED, the drive is disconnected electronically, and
automated and unmanned operation of electric devices is cannot be remotely controlled. In order to restore remote
needed. control it is necessary to disconnect the drive for 30 s.
In order to speed up the circuit breaker’s switch off (e.g. At tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent re-
safety STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt lease, by auxiliary releases, or by TEST push button (in
trip can be used. drive mode AUTO), the motor drive automatically accu-
On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over mulates energy (circuit breaker loading), motor drive is
MP-BL-X230 switch to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL: then ready to switch on the circuit breaker
- mode AUTO – remote control. The circuit breaker is con- Drive can be locked in off position by lamellar lock (it is
trolled by buttons for electric switch off/on. The circuit part of the drive with two keys) or by up to three pad-
breaker can be switched off by TEST button on the over- locks (shank diameter max. 4 ÷ 7 mm).
current release. Drive can by furnished with the counter of cycles.
- mode MANUAL – manual control. Control voltage is not Switch on button can be covered and sealed (OD-BL-KT01).
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using The transparent part of front panel enables to determine
the green button on the motor drive front panel and the state of circuit breaker according to the lever posi-
switched off using the red button on the overcurrent tion.
release. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off Drive can be connected by terminal block with screws or
is functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by by means of multi-pole connector with cavities (in order
means of hinged lever. to connect cables special tongs have to be used).
- possibility of remote signalling of the state of the switch
AUTO/MANUAL.
Specifications
Type MP-BL-X…, MP-BL-X…-P
Operating voltage Ue AC 110, 230 V
DC 110, 220 V
Control impulse length for switching on >20 ÷ 1 500 ms1)
Control impulse length for switching off >20 ms ÷ ∞ 1)
Time to switching on <70 ms
DIMENSIONS, see page H23 Time to storage (loading) of motor drive at Ue AC 230 V 14 s
DC 220 V 18 s
Time to switch-off of circuit breaker Ue AC 230 V 10 s
DC 220 V 12 s
DC 200 W
Protection AC 110 V, AC 230 V LTN-4C-1, LTN-2C-1
DC 110 V, DC 220 V LTN-UC-4C-1, LTN-UC-2C-1
Rated operating current of the change-over switch Ie / Ue 6 A / AC 250 V
AUTO/MANUAL
1)
For sequence of control impulses, see page H46
OD-BL-KT01
H43
MOTOR DRIVES 3P
Specifications
2 1 70 2 1 10 000 ÷ 12 000
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
60 10 000 ÷ 12 000
1.44
3.4 1.43
3.3 1 1.44
3.4 1.43
3.3 1
1.14 1.13 1.14 1.13
0 0
2.14 2.13 2.14 2.13
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch 2.44 2.43 Auxiliary switch
60 10 000 ÷ 12 000
1.32
14 1.31
13 1 1.32
14 1.31
13 1
1.22 1.21 1.22 1.21
2.22 2.21
0 2.22 2.21
0
2.32 2.31 Relative switch 2.32 2.31 Relative switch
3.44 3.43 1 3.44 3.43 1

3.14 3.13 3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13
0 4.14 4.13 0
4.44 4.43 Relative switch 4.44 4.43 Relative switch
3.32 3.31 1 3.32 3.31 1

3.22 3.21 3.22 3.21
4.22 4.21
0 4.22 4.21
0
4.32 4.31 4.32 4.31
t [ms] t [ms]
Diagram
Ovládací obvod
Control motorového
circuit pohonu
of motor drive
breaker/switch-disconnector breaker/switch-disconnector
Q3
L+ Switched on
Switched off by releases or

ON by TEST push button
OFF electrically (loaded state)
B
Diagram description
Motorový
Motor drivepohon Spínače
Switches
relativní
relative Symbol Description
MP motor drive MP-BL-X...
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
5 7 3 4 1 9
X3 M motor
P storage device
SSI switch to indicate MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C)
PS-BL-2200

NC NO - it is not a part of motor drive
SSI
C
ON switch on button
M P
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page H43
MP
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
6 2 10
X3
dutinaNo.
dutina
cavity č.č.4
44
N-
H44
MOTOR DRIVES 3P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by shunt trip or undervoltage release States and positions of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever
Main contacts
2 1 20
Switched on
4 3 1
6 5
0 Switched off by releases or by TEST push
Auxiliary switch button
30 Switched off manually or by motor drive
1.44
3.4 1.43
3.3 1
1.14 1.13
0
2.14 2.13
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
30 Diagram description
1.32
14 1.31
13 1
1.22 1.21
0
Symbol Description
2.22 2.21
2.32 2.31 Relative switch MP motor drive MP-BL-X...
3.44 3.43 1
30 8 000 M motor
3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13
0 P storage device
30 8 000
3.32 3.31 1 SSI switch to indicate MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C)
3.22 3.21
0 B recommended wiring of the control circuits
4.22 4.21
4.32 4.31 - not included in motor drive order
t [ms]
ON switch on button
Q3 motor drive circuit breaker - see page H43
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push button) Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push button)
and tripping by shunt trip a tripping by undervoltage release
Ovládací
Control obvod
Control obvod
circuit of motor drive
Q3 Q3
L+ L+
ON ON
OFF OFF
B B
Motorový
Switches Pom. spouště
Auxiliary releases Motorový
Switches Pom. spouště
Auxiliary releases
relativní
relative relativní
relative
D1 C1 D1 C1
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
5 7 3 4 1 9 5 7 3 4 1 9
X3 X3
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
NC NO NC NO
SV -BL-X...
SV -BL-X...
SP-BL-X...
SP-BL-X...
SSI SSI
C C
or or
M P M P
MP MP
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
6 2 10 6 2 10
X3 J D2 C2 X3 J D2 C2
dutinaNo.
dutina
cavity č.č.4
44 dutina
cavity
dutina č.5
No.
č. 5 dutinaNo.
dutina
cavity č.č.4
44 dutina
cavity č.5
dutinaNo.
č. 55
N- N- N- N-
H45
MOTOR DRIVES 3P
Specifications

Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent release, shunt trip
or undervoltage release and switching on by motor drive
10 000 ÷ 12 000 70 70
HK 1 HK 1
0 0
10 000 ÷ 12 000 > 10 000 8 000 > 12 000
PS 1 RS 1
0 0
>100 > 20 000
> 20 000
20 ÷ ∞ 20 ÷ 1 500 20 ÷ 1 500
1 1
0 0

HK main contacts
Switched on
PS auxiliary switch
RS relative switch
Switched off by releases or by TEST push button
R OFF circuit breaker closing instant by release
Switched off manually or by motor drive IMP ON make impulse for the motor drive
electrically (loaded state) IMP OFF break impulse for the motor drive
H46
Modeion
ACCESSORIES OF MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
P
Accessories of moulded case
Modeion circuit breakers
DELAY UNIT
Type Product code Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]

BZ-BX-X230-A 36696 enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers 0.12 1
1 2 3
Ue Ue Ue
Circuit breaker Delay [s]

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1st level 2nd level 3rd leve
Ue [AC] Ue [DC] Ue [AC] Ue [DC] Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
BC160 1.0 2.0 3.2 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
BD250, BH630 0.6 1.2 1.9
BZ-BX-X230-A BL1000, BL1600 0.5 1.0 1.5 STOP STOP STOP
U< U< U<
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
1 2 3
Ue Ue Ue
+ + +
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
Ue [AC] Ue [DC] Ue [AC] Ue [DC] Ue [AC] Ue [DC]

1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
STOP STOP STOP

U< U< U<
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
BZ-BX-X230-A
65,5
65.5
45
86
88
52,5
52.5 5,3
5.3 24
44
62
AUTOMATIC STANDBY UNIT MODI
Type Description Weight [kg] Package [pc]

MODI ZA... - enables safe control of switching of two power supplies to one or 10 1
two loads with exclusion of parallel operation of the power supplies
- enables various adaptations according to the customer‘s
requirements
- for backup operation with a transformer or generator
- from 16 to 6 300 A
- for circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors Modeion and Arion WL
- for detail information see catalogue Automatic standby unit MODI ZA
ZA-01-6106
P2
Accessories
of moulded case circuit breakers Modeion
TESTER OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Tester of overcurrent releases of circuit breakers BD250.., BH630..,
ZES4 17273 3.75 1
BL1000S and BL1600S
- service device for checking the functionality of electronic overcurrent releases and switching units for Modeion circuit breakers
- tests: - overcurrent releases
- functionality of switching unit tripping mechanism
- current transformers
- tests overcurrent releases: L001, DTV3, MTV8, MTV9, U001
ZES4 - tests switching units for circuit breakers: BD250N, BD250S, BH630N, BH630S, BL1000S, BL1600S
Tester must be connected to an external power supply. Power supply voltage of tester is AC 230 V
For more detailed information and documentation contact our technical support No.: +420 465 672 222 or visit our websites www.oez.com
CONTROL RELAYS FOR BD250 AND BH630
Type Order code Specification Weight [kg] Package [pc]

OD-BHD-RX01 37425 AC/DC 24 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RX02 37426 AC/DC 48 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RA03 37427 AC 110 ÷ 230 V 0.06 1
OD-BHD-RD04 37428 DC 110 V 0.06 1
- control relay is suitable for control of the circuit breaker with motor drive in withdrawable/plug-in device or in combination with mechanical
interlocking by Bowden, see page E72, E73, F70, F71
OD-BHD-RA03
Specifications
Type OD-BHD-R…
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue AC/DC 24 V, AC/DC 48 V,
AC 110 ÷ 230 V, DC 110 V
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Consumption at Un at AC 24 ÷ 230 V 1.2 VA ÷ 2.6 VA
at DC 24 ÷ 220 V 1.4 W ÷ 1.7 W
Electrical endurance 30 000 cycles
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Control impulse
Min. excitation time 15 ms
Max. excitation time unlimited
Other data
Mounting on “U“ rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ +50 °C
Working position arbitrary
Seismic resistance 3g / 8 ÷ 50 Hz
OD-BHD-R...
~88
65,5
65.5
45
86
17,5
17.5 ~4,5
4.5 24
44
62
P3
Accessories
Modeion of moulded case circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR
Type 5SV8 000-6KK 5SV8 001-6KK 5SV8 200-6KK

Standards EN 62020 EN 62020 EN 62020
IEC 62020 IEC 62020 IEC 62020
Approval marks
Number of independent circuits 1 1 4
Rated residual current 0.03 ÷ 5 A 0.03 ÷ 30 A 0.03 ÷ 30 A
Maximum inactivity time 0.02 ÷ 5 s 0.02 ÷ 10 s 0.02 ÷ 10 s
Type A (up to IΔn = 3 A) A (up to IΔn = 3 A) A (up to IΔn = 3 A)
5SV8000-6KK
AC (IΔn from 3 to 5 A) AC (IΔn from 3 to 30 A) AC (IΔn from 3 to 30 A)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 230 V AC 230 V AC 230 V
Operating voltage range AC 164 ÷ 284 V AC 164 ÷ 284 V AC 164 ÷ 284 V
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Input power 3 VA 6 VA 6 VA
Mounting on “U“ rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection - on the front panel IP41 IP41 IP41
Degree of protection - of conductors terminal IP20 IP20 IP20
Other parameters
External remote trip/reset -/yes yes/yes yes/yes
Local signalling reaching of relative low value IΔn yes yes yes
(ALARM)
5SV8001-6KK , 5SV8200-6KK Remote signalling reaching of relative low value IΔn
- yes yes
(ALARM)
Local signalling: supply yes yes yes
ALARM yes yes yes
failure yes yes yes
value IΔn yes yes yes
Display - yes yes
Sealing of control panel setting yes yes yes
Transformer internal diameter 30 ÷ 210 mm 30 ÷ 210 mm 30 ÷ 210 mm
Max. length of conductors to the transformer
10 m 10 m 10 m
(screened conductor)
Control circuit (inputs - external switching off / reset)
Rated operating voltage Uc - AC/DC 110 ÷ 230 V AC 230 V
Operating voltage range - AC/DC 110 ÷ 284 V AC 230 ÷ 284 V
Input power - 0,7 W 0,7 W
Control circuit (outputs)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 002 40
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 230 V AC 230 V AC 230 V
Rated current Ie 6A 6A 6A
Max. switched power - AC-1 1 500 VA 1 500 VA 1 500 VA
Electrical endurance 10x 106 operating cycles 10x 106 operating cycles 10x 106 operating cycles
Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Connection
Connection - conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) 1) 0.2 ÷ 2 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2 mm2
Torque 0.5 ÷ 0.6 Nm 0.5 ÷ 0.6 Nm 0.5 ÷ 0.6 Nm
Working conditions
Ambient temperature °C -10 ÷ +50 °C -10 ÷ +50 °C -10 ÷ +50 °C
Relative humidity 5 ÷ 95 % 5 ÷ 95 % 5 ÷ 95 %
Max. sea level 2 000 m 2 000 m 2 000 m
1)
Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts.
Total max. switching off time

Maximum inactivity time - adjusted value
20 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1 000 ms
1x IΔn < 80 ms < 135 ms < 240 ms < 340 ms < 440 ms < 540 ms < 790 ms < 1 050 ms
2x IΔn < 60 ms < 130 ms < 230 ms < 330 ms < 435 ms < 540 ms < 780 ms < 1 040 ms
P4
Accessories
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR – ANALOG
Description
designed for monitoring of leakage current (residual/ mounting on “U“ rail
/fault current) and protection against fire e.g. due to measurement by means of external summation current
worsened insulation or sneak currents transformer
possibility of setting of residual current IΔn and setting of circuit breaker switching off by means of shunt trip or
limit time of inactivity of IΔt (see parameters) by means undervoltage release
of rotary switches
Local signalling Remote signalling:

5SV8000-6KK first LED signals functionality of the relay and current by means of make-and-break contact (CO)
transformer: serves for signalling of reach of the set value of IΔn and/or
LED is lighting - the relay is in order for circuit breaker switching off via undervoltage release
LED does not light - the relay is not supplied or shunt trip
LED is flashing - interrupted connection between the relay
and the transformer, or broken secondary winding Control
the second LED signals value of the passing current: the TEST push-button serves for testing of the function of
LED is lighting - signalling reach of 100 % residual current both the relay and circuit breaker - disconnects the circuit
LED is flashing - flashing period increases with increasing if the relay trips (switches the circuit breaker off ) it is
residual current necessary to reset it by the “RESET“ push-button, or
interrupt its supply and thus perform the remote reset
setting can be sealed
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram with shunt trip
EXT. RESET Q3
N L1 L2 L3
5 6 7 8 N 1 3 5
TEST
C2 Q
RESET
U
C1
RCM
1 2 3 4 J N 2 4 6
S1
S2
Wiring diagram with undervoltage release

EXT. RESET Q3
N L1 L2 L3
5 6 7 8 N 1 3 5
Diagram description
TEST
Symbol Description
D2 Q
RESET
U<
J circuit breaker
D1
RCM residual current monitor
TEST test push-button of the relay
RCM
1 2 3 4 J N 2 4 6 RESET local reset push-button
EXT. STOP/RESET remote reset push-button or STOP push-button1)
S1 S1,S2 current transformer terminals
S2 Q3 protection of relay LTN-2C-1
1)
only in combination with an undervoltage release
P5
Accessories
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR - DIGITAL

Description
designed for monitoring of leakage current (residual/ mounting on “U“ rail
/fault current) and protection against fire e.g. due to measurement by means of external transformer
worsened insulation or sneak currents circuit breaker switching off by means of shunt trip or
possibility of setting of residual current IΔn and setting of undervoltage release
maximum inactivity time IΔt by means of push-buttons possibility of setting of characteristic S - selective
and the display (see table)
presentation of cause of trip and of current value of re-
sidual current on the display
5SV8001-6KK
Local signalling Remote signalling
the first LED signals functionality of the relay and trip in by means of make-and-break contact (CO)
reach of the set residual current: serves for signalling of reach of the set value of IΔn and/or
LED gives a green light - the relay is supplied for circuit breaker switching off via undervoltage release
LED gives a red light - signalling of reach of 100 % re- or shunt trip
sidual current possibility of remote switching off by applying voltage
the second LED signals reach of relative low set value: AC/DC 110 ÷ 230 V on potential free terminals number
LED gives a yellow light - signalling of reach of the set value 1 and 2
the TEST push-button serves for testing of the function of
both the relay and circuit breaker - disconnects the circuit
if the relay trips (switches the circuit breaker off ) it is
necessary to reset it by the ”RESET” push-button, or
interrupt its supply and thus perform the remote reset
Wiring diagram
Q3 N L1 L2 L3
EXT. STOP/RESET
10 11 12 13 14 15 N 1 3 5
TEST
C2 Q
U
RESET
C1
RCM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J N 2 4 6
S1
S2
ALARM
Wiring diagram with undervoltage release

Q3 N L1 L2 L3
EXT. STOP/RESET
10 11 12 13 14 15 N 1 3 5
Diagram description
Symbol Description
TEST J circuit breaker
D2 Q
RCM residual current monitor
U<
RESET
D1
TEST test push-button of the relay
RESET local reset push-button
RCM EXT. STOP/RESET remote reset push-button or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J N 2 4 6
STOP push-button
S1, S2 current transformer terminals
S1
ALARM signalling of reach of the set
S2 value of IΔn
ALARM
Q3 protection of relay LTN-2C-1
P6
Accessories
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR - DIGITAL, 4-CHANNEL
Description
designed for monitoring of leakage current (residual/fault mounting on “U“ rail
current) and protection against fire e.g. due to worsened measurement by means of an external transformer; it is
insulation or sneak currents possible to connect up to 4 transformers
possibility of setting of residual current IΔn and setting of circuit breaker switching off by shunt trip
maximum inactivity time IΔt by means of push-buttons possibility of setting of characteristic S – selective
and the display (see table)
presentation of cause of trip and of current value of re-
sidual current on the display
5SV8200-6KK
Local signalling Remote signalling
the first LED signals functionality of the relay and trip in by means of make-and-break contact (CO)
reach of the set residual current: serves for signalling of reach of the set value of IΔn and/or
LED gives a green light - the relay is supplied for circuit breaker switching off via undervoltage release
LED gives a red light - signalling of reach of 100 % resi- or shunt trip
dual current possibility of remote switching off by applying voltage
the second LED signals reach of relative low set value: AC/DC 110 ÷ 230 V on potential free terminal number 12
LED gives a yellow light - signalling of reach of the set value the TEST push-button serves for testing of the function of
both the relay and circuit breaker - disconnects the circuit
if the relay trips (switches the circuit breaker off ) it is
necessary to reset it by the “RESET“ push-button, or in-
terrupt its supply and thus perform the remote reset
Wiring diagram
- connecting of circuit breakers - connecting of current transformers
L N L N
N 1 3 5
C2 Q
U
C1
J N 2 4 6
EXT. STOP/RESET EXT. STOP/RESET

S1
S2
Q3 N 1 3 5 Q3
T1
C2 Q
U
10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15
C1
J N 2 4 6
TEST TEST
S1
S2
RESET RESET
T2 N 1 3 5
C2 Q
U
C1
RCM RCM
1 2 4 5 7 8 J N 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 6 9
S1
ALARM S2 ALARM
T3
N 1 3 5
C2 Q
U
S2
S1
S2
S1
S2
S2
S1
S1
C1
J N 2 4 6 T4 T3 T2 T1
S1
S2
T4
P7
Accessories
RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITOR

Dimensions
Residual current monitor 5SV8000-6KK Residual current monitor 5SV8001-6KK, 5SV8200-6KK

36 54
45
67
85
45
67
85
44 44
6 6
68 68
Measuring current transformers 5SV8700-0KK, 5SV8701-0KK Measuring current transformers 5SV87...-0KK

A
33
32
B
B
A
E
C
D
C D
Type A B C D Type A B C D E F G H
5SV8700-0KK 60 20 46 24 5SV8702-0KK 100 79 26 49 35 35 43 6.5
5SV8701-0KK 70 30 59 30 5SV8703-0KK 130 110 32 66 70 52 57 6.5
46
5SV8704-0KK 170 146 38 94 105 72 73 6.5

Type Rated current Max. current, max. 2 s 5SV8705-0KK 230 196 49 123 140 97 98 6.5
5SV8706-0KK 299 284 69 161 210 141 142 6.5
H
5SV8700-0KK ≤ 40 A 240 A
5SV8701-0KK ≤ 63 A 380 A
Type Rated current Max. current, max. 2 s
5SV8702-0KK ≤ 80 A 480 A
5SV8703-0KK ≤ 200 A 1 200 A
5SV8704-0KK ≤ 250 A 1 500 A
5SV8705-0KK ≤ 500 A 3 000 A
5SV8706-0KK ≤ 600 A 3 600 A
NOTICE
All active conductors (including N conductor) must be led through the summation transformer.
Cables, which are not led through the summation transformer, must be led 20 cm from the summation transformer as a minimum.
The transformer must have internal diameter 1.5 larger than the external diameter of the conductors going through it.
P8
A ccessories
SPARE PARTS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS MODEION
Spare parts for BC160N
Type Order code Name - description Weight [kg] Package
OD-BC-SP01 OEZ:34456 Control lever 0.002 1
OD-BC-DV01 OEZ:20606 Conductor holder 0.001 1
OD-BC-MS01 OEZ:20607 Set of screws M3x30, 2 pcs 0.03 1
CS-BC-T011 OEZ:20622 Clamp terminals, Cu/Al cables 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2, up to 125 A, 3 pcs 0.03 1
CS-BC-T012 OEZ:20623 Clamp terminals, Cu/Al cables 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2, up to 160 A, 3 pcs 0.005 1
Circuit breaker BC160 CS-BC-T411 OEZ:33656 Clamp terminals, Cu/Al cables 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2, up to 125 A, 1 pc 0.094 1
CS-BC-T412 OEZ:33657 Clamp terminals, Cu/Al cables 2.5 ÷ 95 mm2, up to 160 A, 1 pc 0.095 1
OD-BC-KS01 OEZ:20624 Terminal cover, upper or lower terminals, 3P design, 1 pc 0.01 1
OD-BC-KS41 OEZ:33659 Terminal cover, upper or lower terminals, 4P design, 1 pc 0.015 1
OD-BC-KON2 OEZ:37798 Connector and sockets for MP-BC-X...-B 0.02 1
Spare parts for BD250N, BD250S

OD-BD-SP01 OEZ:34457 Control lever 0.007 1
OD-BD-DV01 OEZ:15329 Conductor holder 0.002 1
OD-BD-MS01 OEZ:14419 Set of screws M4x35, 4 pcs 0.018 1
OD-BD-KS01 OEZ:24720 Terminal cover, upper or lower terminals, 3P design, 4 pc 0.1 1
OD-BD-KS44 OEZ:35896 Terminal cover, lower terminals, 4P design, 1 pc 0.1 1
OD-BD-KS45 OEZ:35897 Terminal cover, upper terminals, 4P design, 1 pc 0.1 1
OD-BHD-JUMP OEZ:34460 Jumper for auxiliary releases 0.001 1
OD-BHD-KON2 OEZ:34461 Connector and sockets for MP-BD, BH 0.004 1
Circuit breaker BD250 OD-BX-KON1 OEZ:34462 Connector and sockets for OD-xx-KA01 0.017 1
Spare parts for BH630N, BH630S

OD-BH-SP01 OEZ:34458 Control lever 0.012 1
OD-BH-DV01 OEZ:15331 Conductor holder 0.002 1
OD-BH-MS01 OEZ:14420 Set of screws M5x25, 4 pcs 0.03 1
OD-BH-KS01 OEZ:24730 Terminal cover, upper or lower terminals, 3P design, 1 pc 0.15 1
OD-BH-KS44 OEZ:35894 Terminal cover, lower terminals, 4P design, 1 pc 0.2 1
OD-BH-KS45 OEZ:35895 Terminal cover, upper terminals, 4P design, 1 pc 0.2 1
OD-BHD-JUMP OEZ:34460 Jumper for auxiliary releases 0.001 1
OD-BHD-KON2 OEZ:34461 Connector and sockets for MP-BD,BH 0.004 1
OD-BX-KON1 OEZ:34462 Connector and sockets for OD-xx-KA01 0.017 1
Circuit breaker BH630
Spare parts for BL1000S, BL1600S

OD-BL-SP01 OEZ:34459 Control lever 0.03 1
OD-BL-MS01 OEZ:14854 Set of screws M8x80, 4 pcs 0.144 1
OD-BL-KON2 OEZ:34463 Connector and sockets for MP-BL-X… 0.004 1
OD-BX-KON1 OEZ:34462 Connector and sockets for OD-xx-KA01 0.017 1
Circuit breaker BL1600
P9
Accessories
NOTES
P10
Modeion
t
IR
OTHER TECHNICAL PARAMETERS tR
Isd
tsd
Ii
R
Modeion Other technical parameters
FUNCTIONS AND PROPERTIES OF THE OVERCURRENT RELEASES

Introduction
Overcurrent release which measures/monitors the current pass- overload limit is given by rated current In or reduced current Special overcurrent releases
ing through the circuit breaker is part of every circuit breaker. Its IR - the value of IR can be set for most types of the overcur- the short-circuit protection range is further divided; it
main task is to get an impulse for circuit breaker switching off rent releases - In or IR must be never higher than the rated contains, beside the short-circuit release also a selective
if the value of current which is given by tripping characteristic current of the protected device release
of each circuit breaker or overcurrent release is exceeded. The EN 60947-2 sets two fixed values of time and current that according to EN 60947-2 this range is called independent
switching off itself based on the impulse from the overcurrent must be always met by the circuit breaker: time-delayed release – parameter Isd
release is ensured by the switching system – another main part unlike the short-circuit release, the selective release can
Conventional non-tripping current
of each circuit breaker. have delay of up to 1 000 ms – parameter tsd - thus it can
- the circuit breaker must not break 1.05 In or IR in 2 hours
reach a higher or full selectivity with assigned or backup
Division Conventional tripping current circuit breakers or fuses
Overcurrent releases can be divided into two basic types - elec- - The circuit breaker must break 1.3 In or IR in 2 hours
tronic and thermomagnetic (bimetallic) ones. Electronic releases (1.2 In or IR shall apply for protection of motors)
can be solved by discrete components and integrated circuits. - circuit breakers with In or IR lower than 63 A have con- Tripping characteristic of the special overcurrent release
Thermomagnetic releases use bimetal for the evaluation of over- ventional non-breaking an breaking time of 1 hour
load and magnetic circuit for the evaluation of short-circuit. - remaining part of the tripping characteristic is given Overload Selectivity Short-
BC160 circuit breaker has a thermomagnetic release. by the manufacturer (the standard states max. tol- -circuit
BD250, BH630, BL1000, BL1600S circuit breakers have an elec- erances of values for individual ranges) t
IR
tronic release.
for some overcurrent releases it is possible to set the cut-off
Properties, specifications time of thermal release at 7.2 IR - parameter tR – so called
The circuit breakers with both the thermomagnetic and over- thermal release delay, to enable, for instance, start of a mo- tR
current releases protect against overload and short-circuit tor (the start can last up to 30 s, and the current reaches on
respectively. Circuit breaker tripping is given by the tripping average 7.2 In)
Isd
characteristic of the overcurrent release. Tripping characteristic tsd
Ii
defines the time when the circuit breaker switches off in pas- 2nd range:
sage of a current higher than the rated current In or reduced in this range an „independent time release“ (also called
current IR. short-circuit release) ensures device protection against I
„Short-circuit“ - parameter Ii
The tripping characteristic can be divided into two independent time release means that the cut-off time is
principal ranges: independent of the value of current; as soon as current
1st range: reaches certain value, the circuit breaker will immediately
in this range a „dependent time release“ (also called ther- trip (the cut-off time is 10 to 30 ms; some overcurrent
mal release) ensures device protection against „Overload“ releases enable setting of delay 50 ms) - the value of the
the dependent time release means that the breaking time short-circuit release Ii can be set for most types of overcur-
depends indirectly on the strength of current, i.e. the high- rent releases, and thus to adapt it to the impedance loop
er is the current (overload), the shorter is the releasing time and enable start of a motor
- the releasing time is given by the tripping characteristic of
the overcurrent release
Tripping characteristic of the basic overcurrent release
Overload Short-circuit
t
IR
Ii
R2
Other technical parameters Modeion
Basic overcurrent releases
D, DTV3 – for protection of distribution transformers and lines with a minimum motor load
- it is possible to set reduced current IR and the value of short-circuit release Ii
M – for protection of motors - it is possible to set reduced current IR

- The value of short-circuit release is fixed at 10x In
MTV8 – TV mode – for protection of distribution transformers and lines feeding motors
- it is possible to set reduced current IR
- it is possible to set thermal release delay tR to enable motor starting
- it is possible to set the short-circuit release value Ii and its delay to enable motor starting
– M mode – for protection of motors (complete protection of motors)

- it is possible to set reduced current IR
- it is possible to set thermal release delay tR to enable motor starting
- undercurrent release is active, and will switch off the circuit breaker in 4 s in phase failure
- it is possible to set the short-circuit release value Ii and its delay to enable motor starting
L, L001 – for protection of lines with small current impulses

- the value of rated current In is fixed (the circuit breakers are manufactured in standardized series of currents)
- the value of short-circuit release Ii is fixed at 4 In
Overcurrent release label

Setting tripping characteristic parameters Recording set values
Signalling release state and value Terminals for Designation of an overcurrent

of passing current by means of LED connection of a tester releases - basic parameters
R3

Reduced current IR - after drop of current in the circuit below the set value Short-circuit release value Ii
9 reduced current IR shall be set according to of IR the thermal memory is reset, and in next overload 9 the short-circuit release value Ii must be
the rated current of the protected device the releasing time is not shortened (the time follows set higher than the maximum peak cur-
or, for instance, permissible load current from the tripping characteristic in so called „cold“ rent in the circuit (making current of the
of the cable state) protected device) and at the same time
È undesired circuit breaker trip will take - thermal memory can be switched off only in certain it must be set to fulfil the conditions of
place during normal operation cases, when the protected device is rated for repeated automatic disconnection from the power
Ç overload of the protected device or cable overload (e.g. spot welding machines or rail cranes) supply in failure
can occur È undesired circuit breaker switching off will
take place (e.g. in motor starting)
Thermal memory T (restart) Ç circuit breaker will not disconnect the cir-
TV/M mode
Thermal memory provides protection of the protected device cuit from power supply in case of failure
TV – mode for protection of distribution transformers and
against repeated overload, in particular in attempt at restart (short-circuit) in prescribed time
lines feeding mainly motors
after switching off by overload
– undercurrent release is not active
thermal memory switched on - the circuit breaker in protection of motors or lines with motor or capacitive
„remembers“ previous thermal overload load it is suitable to set a delay of the short-circuit release
M – mode for direct protection of motors
- after circuit breaker switching off by overload it is not to enable motor starting (e.g. a motor can take up to 15 In
– undercurrent release is active (in phase failure the cir-
possible to switch it on again for a time; it is necessary for 10 ÷ 15 ms in starting)
cuit breaker trips in 4 s)
to wait until the both protected device and the circuit
breaker will „cool down“
Thermal release delay tR
- the circuit breaker remembers previous thermal overload
even after drop of current in the circuit below In or IR, 9 in protection of motors or lines with pre-
vailing motor load it is necessary to set
and at next thermal overload the releasing time of the
the thermal release delay tR correctly and
thermal release is shortened (the time follows from the
thus enable motor starting
tripping characteristic in so called „hot“ state)
È undesired circuit breaker switching off will
- the thermal memory must remain active in protection
take place in motor starting
of distribution transformers, lines and motors
Ç overload of the motor or cable can occur
thermal memory switched off - the circuit breaker
„does not remember“ previous thermal overload
- after circuit breaker switching off by overload the thermal
memory will reset, and the circuit breaker can be imme-
diately switched on again, and in the next overload the
releasing time is not shortened (the time follows from the
tripping characteristic in so called „cold“ state)
Setting TV/M mode of the thermal memory

Upper left quarter - M mode Upper right quarter - M mode - thermal
- thermal memory switched off memory switched on permanently
Legend:
9 correct setting
È wrong setting - low value
Lower left quarter - TV mode Lower right quarter - TV mode
- thermal memory switched off - thermal memory switched on Ç wrong setting - high value
R4
CONNECTION OPTIONS
BC160N BD250 BH630 BL1000 BL1600

Direct connection of Cu/Al cable with a connecting set or directly to circuit breaker
2,5 ÷ 10 mm2
16 mm2
25 mm2 Directly to a circuit breaker
35 ÷ 50 mm2
CS-BD-T011 1)
CS-BD-B011 CS-BH-B012
70 ÷ 95 mm2
CS-BH-T011 1) CS-BL-W011 CS-BL-W011

120 ÷ 150 mm2
150 ÷ 240 mm2 CS-BD-B012

CS-BH-B011
Direct connection of more Cu/Al cables with connecting set
2x (25 ÷ 50) mm2
CS-BC-B021 CS-BD-B021 CS-BH-B022

2x (70 ÷ 120) mm2
CS-BL-W010 CS-BL-W010
2x (150 ÷ 240) mm2 CS-BD-B022 CS-BH-B021
2)
CS-BL-B002 CS-BL-B002 2)
3x (25 ÷ 50) mm2
CS-BH-B032
3x (70 ÷ 120) mm2
CS-BL-W011 + CS-BL-W010
2
3x (150 ÷ 240) mm CS-BH-B031 CS-BL-B003 2)
4x (150 ÷ 240) mm2 CS-BL-B004 2) CS-BL-B003 2)
5x (2,5 ÷ 25) mm2 CS-BC-B014 CS-BL-B004 2)
6x (6 ÷ 35) mm2 CS-BD-B014 CS-BH-B014
Connection of busbars with connecting set or directly to circuit breaker
12 mm Directly to a circuit breaker
16 mm CS-BC-A011
20 mm
Directly to a circuit breaker
CS-BC-A033
25 mm Directly to a circuit breaker
32 mm
CS-BD-A037
40 mm CS-BH-A037
50 mm
Directly to a circuit breaker Directly to a circuit breaker
60 mm
1)
Cu cable only, 2) conductor cross-section up to 300 mm2
R5
USING MODEION CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN IT NETWORKS

An IT network is a three-phase isolated network that can The deionization space varies according to the connection
be earthed through sufficiently high impedance. All types method. In some cases, insulation foil which we offer as
of the Modeion circuit breakers can be used under certain accessory can be used to reduce the deionization space
conditions in the IT network see the technical parameters (for parameters see page R9).
of the circuit breakers. For BH630, BL1000, BL1600 cir-
cuit breakers, it is necessary to take the limitation of the
deionization space into account.
Deionization spaces for BH630 OD-BHD-KS42 1x
C B B B C OD-BHD-KS02 2x
H
E G
A
F=0 100 ÷ 150

275
D
Connection type Type of cover A B C D E F G H
Insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02 100 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 10 13

Busbars
Insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
100 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
+ Insulating sheet OD-BH-IT
Cable lugs or CS-BH-T011
or CS-BH-B011(B012)
Insulating barriers OD-BH-KS02 150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 20 13
Block terminals CS-BH-B021
or CS-BH-B022 Insulating barriers OD-BH-KS02
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
IT AC 690 V Terminal cover OD-BH-KS03 130 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 50 13
or CS-BH-B022 Terminal cover OD-BH-KS03
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
or CS-BH-B032 Insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
Terminal cover OD-BH-KS03 130 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 12 13
or CS-BH-B032 Terminal cover OD-BH-KS03
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
Busbars Insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02 100 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
Cable lugs or CS-BH-T011
or CS-BH-B011(B012)
or CS-BH-B022 Insulating barriers OD-BH-KS02
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
IT AC 500 V
or CS-BH-B022
or CS-BH-B032 Insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
150 140 20 20/100 1) 105 0 0 13
or CS-BH-B032
In some cases, insulating sheet OD-BH-IT can be used to reduce the deionization space, see the table (for foil parameters see page R9).
1)
Higher value applies in the case of the opposite connection (bottom connection) and the use of insulating barriers.
R6
Deionization spaces for BL1000
OD-BL-KS02
C B C B C
H
F E G
A
200
A1
350
D
Connection type Type of cover A A1 B C D E F G H
Insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02 250 0 210 80 100/200 1) 134.5 0 120 20

Busbars
Insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02
350 100 210 100 100/200 1) 134.5 0 0 20
+ Insulating sheet OD-BL-IT
IT AC 500 V
300 0 210 80 100/200 1) 134.5 0 0 20
Block terminals CS-BL-B…
Terminal cover OD-BL-KS09 300 0 210 50 100/200 1) 134.5 50 120 20
Terminal cover OD-BL-KS09
300 0 210 50 100/200 1) 134.5 50 0 20
In some cases, insulating sheet OD-BL-IT can be used to reduce the deionization space, see the table (for sheet parameters see page R9).
The dimension A1 is the point from which the busbars must be isolated up to a distance given by dimension A.
1)
R7

Deionization spaces for BL1600
OD-BL-KS02
C B C B C
H
F E G
A
200
A1
350
D
Connection type Type of cover A A1 B C D E F G H
Busbars Insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02 400 100 210 50 100/200 1) 134.5 0 200 20

IT AC 500 V - - - - - - - - -
Block terminals CS-BL-B…
Terminal cover OD-BL-KS09 400 0 210 50 100/200 1) 134.5 50 200 20
Terminal cover OD-BL-KS09
- - - - - - - - -
The dimension A1 is the point from which the busbars must be isolated up to a distance given by dimension A.
1)
R8
Insulating sheet for use in IT network

Overview of commonly supplied connecting and mounting The insulating sheet is placed on the front metallic part
sets for replacement of older circuit breakers up to 630 A of the switchboard according to the drawing, see below.
Type Order code Name Weight [kg] Package [pcs]
OD-BH-IT OEZ:45619 Insulating sheet 0.01 1
OD-BL-IT OEZ:45620 Insulating sheet 0.02 1
The size and location of the OD-BH-IT insulating sheet The size and location of the OD-BL-IT insulating sheet
180 350
150 150
300
300
R9
THE USAGE OF SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS AT GIVEN OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

Particular designs of Modeion switch-disconnectors can value of initial peak short-circuit current Ik‘‘ is lower or
be used together with the assigned device (circuit bre- max. equal to the related value from the table:
aker, fuse-link) at the spot of electrical circuit where the
Type of Modeion switch-disconnector

Backup protective device IK” [kA] / AC 400 V
BC160 BD250 BH630 BL1000 BL1600
Circuit breaker BC160 25 25 25 25 25
Circuit breaker BD250 18 18 361), 652) 361), 652) 361), 652)
Circuit breaker BH630 – – 361), 652) 361), 652) 361), 652)
BH630NE305
Circuit breaker BL1000 – – – 50 50
Circuit breaker BL1600 – – – – 50
PN, PLN, PHN gG max. In = 125 A 100 z3) z3) z3) z3)
3) 3)
PN, PLN, PHN gG max. In = 224 A – 65 z z z3)
3)
PN, PHN gG max. In = 500 A – – 65 z z3)
PN, PHN gG max. In = 630 A – – – 65 65

Notes:
1)
Additional values in table 1) are related to the back-up circuit breaker of design N.
2)
Additional values in table 2) are related to the back-up circuit breaker of design S.
3)
Max value of initial peak short-circuit current that enables the usage of switch-disconnector with backup fuse-links of lower rated
currents (see 3)) is determined on the basis of equality of their limited current io.
- In rated current of backup fuse-link has to be min by one degree lower than Ie rated current of the switch-disconnector.
- Given values are valid for voltage AC 400 V.
R10
REPLACEMENT OF FORMERLY PRODUCED OEZ CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Overview of commonly supplied connecting and mounting sets for replacement of older circuit breakers up to 630 A
Original circuit breaker Replacement Connection Mounting
J2RU, J21U-50 BC160N

front connection front connection CS-BC-AJ21 (2 pcs) OD-BC-MS21 (1 pc)
In 12 ÷ 200 A In 16 ÷ 160 A
BA51.33, BA511.33 BC160N

front connection front connection CS-BC-A033 (2 pcs) OD-BC-MS33 (1 pc)
In 16 ÷ 160 A In 16 ÷ 160 A
BD250N
front connection CS-BD-A037 (2 pcs) modification required for mounting BD250N
BA51.37, BA511.37 In 40 ÷ 250 A
front connection
In 37,5 ÷ 400 A BH630N
front connection CS-BH-A037 (2 pcs) modification required for mounting BH630N
In 100 ÷ 630 A
BD250N
front connection CS-BD-A039 (2 pcs) OD-BHD-MS39 (1 pc)
J2U, J2UX, BA511.39 In 40 ÷ 250 A
front connection
In 16 ÷ 630 A BH630N
front connection CS-BH-A039 (2 pcs) OD-BHD-MS39 (1 pc)
In 100 ÷ 630 A
BD250N CS-BD-Z039 (2 pcs) OD-BD-MZ39 (1 pc)

J2U, J2UX, BA511.39 rear connection
In 40 ÷ 250 A
CS-BD-A021 (2 pcs) modification required for mounting BD250N
rear connection
In 16 ÷ 630 A BH630N CS-BH-Z039 (2 pcs) OD-BH-MZ39 (1 pc)
rear connection
In 100 ÷ 630 A
CS-BH-A021 (2 pcs) modification required for mounting BH630N
BD250N
withdrawable design CS-BD-JX75 (2 pcs) OD-BHD-MS75 (1 pc)
J2UX, BA511.39 In 40 ÷ 250 A
withdrawable design
In 125 ÷ 630 A BH630N
withdrawable design CS-BH-JX75 (2 pcs) OD-BHD-MS75 (1 pc)
In 100 ÷ 630 A
BD250N
withdrawable design CS-BD-JT75 (2 pcs) OD-BD-MT75 (1 pc)
J2UX In 40 ÷ 250 A
withdrawable design, electronic trip unit
In 63 ÷ 630 A BH630N
withdrawable design CS-BH-JT75 (2 pcs) OD-BH-MT75 (1 pc)
In 100 ÷ 630 A
R11
RETROFITS OF FORMERLY PRODUCED OEZ CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Overview of commonly performed retrofits

Original circuit breaker Retrofit with circuit breaker Mounting time
BL1000S
fixed/withdrawable design up to 2 hrs
AR10.. In 125 ÷ 1 000 A
fixed design
In 250 ÷ 1 000 A Arion WL1110
In 100 ÷ 1 000 A
BL1600S
AR16.. In 250 ÷ 1 600 A
fixed design
In 250 ÷ 1 600 A Arion WL1116
In 100 ÷ 1 600 A
BL1600S
AR25.. In 250 ÷ 1 600 A
fixed design
In 800 ÷ 2 500 A Arion WL1225
In 100 ÷ 2 500 A
BL1000S
ARV10.. In 125 ÷ 1 000 A
3 versions of withdrawable design
In 250 ÷ 1 000 A Arion WL1110
In 100 ÷ 1 000 A
BL1600S
ARV16.. In 250 ÷ 1600 A
In 250 ÷ 1 600 A Arion WL1116
In 100 ÷ 1 600 A
BL1600S
withdrawable design up to 3 hrs
ARV25.. In 250 ÷ 1 600 A
In 800 ÷ 2 500 A Arion WL1225
In 100 ÷ 2 500 A
AMT.601, AMT.602 BH630N

fixed design fixed design up to 2 hrs
In 28 ÷ 600 A In 100 ÷ 630 A
J2Z50T.. BL1000S
fixed design fixed/withdrawable design up to 1 hr
In 315 ÷ 1 000 A In 125 ÷ 1 000 A
J2Z75T.. BL1000S
withdrawable design fixed/withdrawable design up to 1 hr
In 315 ÷ 1 000 A In 125 ÷ 1 000 A
VMT.06.. BH630N
fixed design fixed design up to 2 hrs
In 300 ÷ 600 A In 100 ÷ 630 A
VMT.1.. BL1000S
2 versions of fixed design fixed/withdrawable design up to 2 hrs
In 500 ÷ 1 000 A In 125 ÷ 1 000 A
BL1600S
VMT.2.. In 250 ÷ 1 600 A
2 versions of fixed design
In 1 000 ÷ 2 000 A Arion WL1220
In 100 ÷ 2 000 A
Note: The above-mentioned retrofits of the older circuit breakers are carried out by certified OEZ-trained companies or by OEZ service.
R12
Modeion
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Note: Precise wording of definitions and texts relating to a given term are detailed in the respective standards, see Name.
Name Symbol Explanation

Rated operating voltage Ue Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its determination, as may also the utili-
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1 zation category. Along with the rated (operating) current, it determines the device’s utilization. The highest
value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater than the value of the rate insulation voltage Ui.
Rated insulation voltage Ui Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and creepage distance.
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2
Rated current In Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninterruptedly. The highest current
EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3 valued tripping the circuit breaker in conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic.
Reduced rated current IR Specifically established, reduced value of In current for a regulated time-dependent (thermal) release
and that the circuit breaker can handle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to In. Changing
IR moves the release’s tripping characteristic along the current axis. Ir = k x In holds where k ≤ 1
Tripping time at a given Ir multiple tR Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that is equal to the given multiple
of IR. Changing tR moves the tripping characteristic along the time axis.
Release current of independent instantaneous Isd Minimum current value that causes tripping of the time-independent delayed release.
(selective) release
Delay of time-independent delayed release tsd If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least Isd but not reaching Isd the circuit breaker
will trip with time delay tsd. Total switching off time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker
itself and is about 10 ÷ 20 ms longer.
Release current of independent instantaneous Ii Minimum current value that causes tripping of the time-independent instantaneous release.
(short-circuit) release
Rated operating current Ie Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the manufacturer with considera-
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3 tion for the rated operating voltage, rated frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of
protective cover, if that comes into consideration.
Rated normal current Iu Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can handle in continuous operation, i.e.
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4 during a period longer than 8 hours (weeks, months, or longer).
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu Value of ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the rms value of the alternating
EN 60947-2; 2.15.1; 4.3.5.2.1 component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in
the mode: 1x switching off of the short-circuit and a following 1x make-break sequence. After testing,
the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct the rated current uninterruptedly. Icu is set for the rated
operating voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or
at the time constant for direct current. Must fulfil the condition: Icu ≥ Ik“
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity Ics Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the rms value of the alternating
EN 60947-2; 2.15.2; 4.3.5.2.2 component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in
the mode: 1x switching off of the short-circuit and a following 2x make-break sequence. May also
be expressed as a percentage of Icu. After testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to
conduct the rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase of the main terminals
may be greater. Ics is set for the rated operating voltage at the rated frequency and at the established
power factor for alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted: Ics ≥ Ik“
Rated short-time withstand current Icw Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer that the device is able to handle
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.1 without damage during a designated time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.4 is the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current Ip.
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.1
S
Modeion
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Note: Precise wording of definitions and texts relating to a given term are detailed in the respective standards, see Name.
Name Symbol Explanation

Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm Value of short-circuit making capacity specified by the manufacturer for the rated operating voltage at
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.2 the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or at the time constant
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.1 for direct current. It is expressed as the maximum assumed peak current.
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.2 Must fulfil the condition: Icm ≥ ip
Rated conditional short-circuit current Icc The rated conditional short-circuit current of an equipment is the value of prospective current, stated by
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.4 the manufacturer, which the equipment, protected by a short-circuit protective device specified by the
EN 60947-2; Supplement L; L.4.2 manufacturer, can withstand satisfactorily for the operating time of this device under the test conditions
specified in the relevant product standard. Must fulfil the condition: Icc ≥ Ik
Initial peak short-circuit current Ik“ Short-circuit current value at the moment of its arising at a given point in the electrical distribution ex-
EN 60909-0; 1.3.5 pressed as the rms value of the alternating symmetrical component of the assumed short-circuit current.
Surge short-circuit current ip Maximum possible momentary value of the assumed short-circuit current. (Corresponds to the mo-
EN 60909-0; 1.3.8 ment the short arises, as a result of which there occurs the peak value of the short-circuit current.)
Prospective short-circuit current Ip Short-circuit current value, which would flow through the circuit if the protection device were replaced
EN 60947-1; 2.5.5 and a short-circuit were experienced by conductors with negligible impedance. (In a three-phase dis-
EN 60909-0; 1.3.3 tribution, it is assumed that the short-circuit is simultaneous in all phases.)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Peak value of the voltage impulse of the prescribed form and polarity which the device is able to with-
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3 stand without failure at the established conditions and pertinent to which is the value of the separating
air distance. Uimp of the device must be equal to or higher than the value established for momentary
overvoltage at the point in the circuit (overvoltage category) where the device is used.
Overvoltage category Numerically defined level of momentary overvoltage, i.e. overvoltage having its origin in atmospheric
EN 60947-1; 2.5.60 or switching. Standard EN 60664-1 establishes for electrical equipment the overvoltage categories:
Overvoltage category IV - service entrance, outside lead
Overvoltage category III - fixed wiring
Overvoltage category II - appliances
Overvoltage category I - light-current appliances
Rated frequency fn Frequency of the supply network for which the device is proposed and that corresponds to its other
EN 60947-1; 4.3.3 characteristics values.
Utilization category Utilization category of circuit breaker establishes whether or not the circuit breaker specifically is
(circuit breakers – time selectivity) intended for providing selectivity by means of intentional time delay (timing selectivity) with other
EN 60947-2; 4.4 protective devices connected in series on the load side in short-circuiting conditions.
Utilization category:
A - circuit breakers are not specifically intended for providing timing selectivity
B - circuit breakers are specifically intended for providing timing selectivity
Utilization category Utilization category defines the assumed use of switch devices (switch-disconnectors). Characterized
(switch-disconnectors – switching mode) by values of current and voltage, expressed as multiples of rated operating current and rated operating
EN 60947-3; 4.4 voltage, and further by power factors or time constants of the circuit.
Utilization category:
AC-21B (DC-21B) - infrequent switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloading
AC-22B (DC-21B) - infrequent switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloading
AC-23B (DC-23B) - infrequent switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads
Pollution degree Pollution degree relates to the conditions of the surrounding environment for which the device is intended.
EN 60947-1; 2.5.58; 6.1.3.2 Pollution degree:
1 - No contamination will occur, or only dry, non-conducting contamination.
2 - Normally occurs only non-conducting contamination, but sometimes there may occur temporary
conductibility due to condensation.
3 - There occurs conductive contamination or dry non-conducting contamination that with the effect
of condensation will become conductive.
4 - Contamination generates continuous conductibility, by means of, for example, conductive dust, rain or snow.
S2
Modeion
INDEX
5 BD250SE405 ...............................E5 CS-BH-B014................................F8 MP-BL-X230-P ...........................H9

BD250SE406 ...............................E5 CS-BH-B021................................F8
5SV8000-6KK .............................P4
BH630NE305 ..............................F4 CS-BH-B022................................F8
N
5SV8001-6KK .............................P4 NS-BC-0010 .............................D12
5SV8200-6KK .............................P4 BH630NE405 ..............................F5 CS-BH-B031................................F8
NS-BC-0010-Au........................D12
5SV8700-0KK .............................P4 BH630NE406 ..............................F5 CS-BH-B032................................F8
5SV8701-0KK .............................P4 BH630SE305 ...............................F4 CS-BH-B411................................F8 O
5SV8702-0KK .............................P4 BH630SE405 ...............................F5 CS-BH-B412................................F8 OD-BC-DIN1 .............................D11
5SV8703-0KK .............................P4 BH630SE406 ...............................F5 CS-BH-B414................................F9 OD-BC-KS02 .............................D14
5SV8704-0KK .............................P4 BL1000SE305 .............................G4 CS-BH-B421................................F9 OD-BC-KS03 .............................D14
5SV8705-0KK .............................P4 BL1000SE320 .............................G4 CS-BH-B422................................F8 OD-BC-MS33 ............................D11
5SV8706-0KK .............................P4 BL1600SE305 .............................H4 CS-BH-B431................................F9 OD-BC-MS21 ............................D11
5SV8900-0KK .............................P4 BL1600SE320 .............................H4 CS-BH-B432................................F9 OD-BC-UP01.............................D14
BZ-BX-X230-A ............................P2 CS-BH-PS41 ................................F9 OD-BC-KA02.............................D14
B CS-BH-JT75 ..............................F9 OD-BC-KS42 .............................D14
BC160NT305-100-D ...................D4 C CS-BH-JX75 ................................F9 OD-BC-KS43 .............................D14
BC160NT305-100-L....................D4 CS-BC-A011..............................D10 CS-BH-PS01 ..............................F8 OD-BD-KK01 .............................E14
BC160NT305-100-M ..................D4 CS-BC-A021..............................D10 CS-BH-T011 ................................F8 OD-BD-KS01 .............................E14
BC160NT305-100-N ...................D5 CS-BC-A033..............................D10 CS-BH-T411 ................................F8 OD-BD-KS03 .............................E14
BC160NT305-125-D ...................D4 CS-BC-AJ21 ..............................D10 CS-BH-Z039 ...............................F8 OD-BD-KS43 .............................E14
BC160NT305-125-L....................D4 CS-BC-B021..............................D10 CS-BL-A010 ...............................H7 OD-BD-MT75 ............................E10
BC160NT305-125-N ...................D5 CS-BC-PS01 ..............................D10 CS-BL-A020 ...............................H7 OD-BD-MZ39 ............................E10
BC160NT305-160-D ...................D4 CS-BC-B014 .............................D10 CS-BL-A021 ................................H7 OD-BD-UP01.............................E14
BC160NT305-160-L....................D4 CS-BC-A411..............................D11 CS-BL-A022 ................................H7 OD-BD-VP01 .............................E14
BC160NT305-160-N ...................D5 CS-BC-A421..............................D11 CS-BL-A015 ................................H7 OD-BD-VP02 .............................E14
BC160NT305-160-V ...................D5 CS-BC-B421..............................D11 CS-BL-A016 ................................H7 OD-BHD-KA01 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-16-D .....................D4 CS-BC-B414..............................D11 CS-BL-B002 ................................H7 OD-BHD-KA02 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-16-M.....................D4 CS-BC-PS41 ..............................D11 CS-BL-B003 ................................H7 OD-BHD-KS02 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-20-D .....................D4 CS-BC-S006 ................................D9 CS-BL-B004 ................................H7 OD-BHD-KS42 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-20-M.....................D4 CS-BC-S416 ................................D9 CS-BL-W010 ...............................H7 OD-BHD-KT01 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-25-D .....................D4 CS-BC-S406 ................................D9 CS-BL-W011 ...............................H7 OD-BHD-MS39 ..................E10, F10
BC160NT305-25-M.....................D4 CS-BC-S016 ................................D9
OD-BHD-MS75 ..................E10, F10
BC160NT305-32-D .....................D4 CS-BD-A011................................E8 M OD-BHD-PP01 ...................E14, F14
BC160NT305-32-M.....................D4 CS-BD-A021................................E8 MB-BD-PV05 ............................E13
OD-BHD-RX01 ............................P3
BC160NT305-32-N .....................D5 CS-BD-A037................................E9 MB-BHD-PV03 ..................E13, F13
OD-BHD-RX02 ............................P3
BC160NT305-40-D .....................D4 CS-BD-A039................................E9 MB-BH-PV04 ............................F13
OD-BHD-RA03 ............................P3
BC160NT305-40-L .....................D4 CS-BD-A421................................E9 MB-BL-PP07...............................H9
OD-BHD-RD04 ............................P3
BC160NT305-40-M.....................D4 CS-BD-B011................................E8 MB-BL-PV08 ..............................H9
OD-BH-KK01 .............................F14
BC160NT305-40-N .....................D5 CS-BD-B012................................E8 MB-BL-VV06 ..............................H9
OD-BH-KS01 .............................F14
BC160NT305-50-D .....................D4 CS-BD-B014................................E8 MP-BC-X024-B .........................D14
OD-BH-KS03 .............................F14
BC160NT305-50-L .....................D4 CS-BD-B021................................E8 MP-BC-X048-B .........................D14
OD-BH-KS43 .............................F14
BC160NT305-50-M.....................D4 CS-BD-B022................................E8 MP-BC-X110-B .........................D14
OD-BH-MT75 ............................F10
BC160NT305-50-N .....................D5 CS-BD-B411................................E8 MP-BC-X230-B .........................D14
OD-BH-MZ39 ............................F10
BC160NT305-63-D .....................D4 CS-BD-B412................................E8 MP-BD-X024.............................E13
OD-BH-UP01.............................F14
BC160NT305-63-L......................D4 CS-BD-B414................................E9 MP-BD-X024-P .........................E13
OD-BH-VP01 .............................F14
BC160NT305-63-M.....................D4 CS-BD-B421................................E9 MP-BD-X048.............................E13
OD-BH-VP02 .............................F14
BC160NT305-63-N .....................D5 CS-BD-B422................................E9 MP-BD-X048-P .........................E13
OD-BL-KA01 .............................H10
BC160NT305-80-D .....................D4 CS-BD-PS41 ................................E9 MP-BD-X110.............................E13
OD-BL-KS01 .............................H10
BC160NT305-80-L .....................D4 CS-BD-JT75 ................................E9 MP-BD-X110-P .........................E13
OD-BL-KS02 .............................H10
BC160NT305-80-M.....................D4 CS-BD-JX75 ................................E9 MP-BD-X230.............................E13
OD-BL-KS03 .............................H10
BC160NT305-80-N .....................D5 CS-BD-PS01 ................................E8 MP-BD-X230-P .........................E13
OD-BL-KS04 .............................H10
BC160NT405-..-L........................D6 CS-BD-T011 ................................E8 MP-BH-X024.............................F13
OD-BL-KS08 .............................H10
BC160NT405-..-D .......................D6 CS-BD-T411 ................................E8 MP-BH-X024-P .........................F13
OD-BL-KS09 .............................H10
BC160NT405-..-N .......................D6 CS-BD-Z039 ................................E9 MP-BH-X048.............................F13
OD-BL-KT01 .............................H10
BC160NT405-160-V ...................D8 CS-BH-A011................................F8 MP-BH-X048-P .........................F13
OD-BL-MS02 ............................H10
BC160NT406-..-L........................D7 CS-BH-A021................................F8 MP-BH-X110.............................F13
OD-BL-UP01 .............................H10
BC160NT406-..D.........................D7 CS-BH-A037................................F9 MP-BH-X110-P .........................F13
OD-BL-VP01 .............................H10
BC160NT406-..-N .......................D7 CS-BH-A039................................F9 MP-BH-X230.............................F13
BD250NE305 ..............................E4 CS-BH-PS01 ................................F8 MP-BH-X230-P .........................F13 P
BD250NE405 ..............................E5 CS-BH-A421................................F8 MP-BL-X110 ...............................H9 PS-BC-0010 .............................D12
BD250NE406 ..............................E5 CS-BH-B011................................F8 MP-BL-X110-P ...........................H9 PS-BC-0010-Au ........................D12
BD250SE305 ...............................E4 CS-BH-B012................................F8 MP-BL-X230 ...............................H9 PS-BHD-0010 ....................E11, F11
T
Modeion
INDEX
PS-BHD-0010-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BD-CK20..............................E12 SE-BD-0250-L001 .......................E6 SE-BL-J800-MTV8 ......................G5

PS-BHD-0020 ....................E11, F11 RP-BD-CK21..............................E12 SE-BD-0250-MTV8 .....................E6 SE-BL-J800-U001 .......................G5
PS-BHD-0020-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BD-CK30..............................E12 SE-BD-0250-MTV9......................E6 SO-BHD-0010....................E14, F14
PS-BHD-0100 ....................E11, F11 RP-BD-CK31..............................E12 SE-BD-0250-V001.......................E6 SO-BL-0010..............................H10
PS-BHD-0100-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BH-CK10..............................F12 SE-BH-0250-4D01 ......................F6 SP-BC-X024 ..............................D12
PS-BHD-0200 ....................E11, F11 RP-BH-CK20..............................F12 SE-BH-0250-DTV3 ......................F6 SP-BC-X110 ..............................D12
PS-BHD-0200-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BH-CK21..............................F12 SE-BH-0250-L001 .......................F6 SP-BC-X230 ..............................D12
PS-BHD-1000 ....................E11, F11 RP-BH-CK30..............................F12 SE-BH-0250-MTV8 .....................F6 SP-BHD-0002 ....................E11, F11
PS-BHD-1000-Au...............E11, F11 RP-BH-CK31..............................F12 SE-BH-0250-MTV9......................F6 SP-BHD-X024 ....................E11, F11
PS-BHD-1100 ....................E11, F11 RP-BHD-CB10....................E13, F13 SE-BH-0315-L001 .......................F6 SP-BHD-X024-0001...........E11, F11
PS-BHD-1100-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BHD-CD10....................E13 ,F13 SE-BH-0400-4D01 ......................F6 SP-BHD-X110 ....................E11, F11
PS-BHD-2000 ....................E11, F11 RP-BHD-CN40....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0400-DTV3 ......................F6 SP-BHD-X110-0001 ..........E11, F11
PS-BHD-2000-Au ..............E11, F11 RP-BHD-CN41....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0400-L001 .......................F6 SP-BHD-X230 ....................E11, F11
PS-BL-2200 ................................H8 RP-BHD-CN60....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0400-MTV8 .....................F6 SP-BHD-X230-0001...........E11, F11
PS-BL-2200-Au ..........................H8 RP-BHD-CN61 ...................E12, F12 SE-BH-0400-MTV9......................F6 SP-BL-X024 ................................H8
RP-BHD-CP10....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0500-L001 .......................F6 SP-BL-X048 ................................H8
R RP-BHD-CP20....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0630-4D01 ......................F6 SP-BL-X110 ................................H8
RCD-BC3-EF06............................D8 RP-BHD-CP21....................E12, F12 SE-BH-0630-DTV3 ......................F6 SP-BL-X230 ................................H8
RCD-BC3-EF16............................D8 RP-BHD-CH10 ...................E13, F13 SE-BH-0630-L001 .......................F6 SP-BL-X400 ................................H8
RCD-BC3-EA06 ...........................D8 RP-BHD-CH20 ...................E13, F13 SE-BH-0630-MTV8......................F6 SP-BL-X500 ................................H8
RCD-BC3-EA16 ...........................D8 RP-BL-CB10................................H9 SE-BH-0630-MTV9......................F6 SV-BC-X024 ..............................D12
RCD-BC4-EF06............................D8 RP-BL-CK10 ................................H9 SE-BH-0630-V001.......................F6 SV-BC-X110 ..............................D12
RCD-BC4-EF16............................D8 RP-BL-CK52 ................................H9 SE-BL-0630-DTV3.......................H5 SV-BC-X230 ..............................D12
RCD-BC4-EA06 ...........................D8 RP-BL-CK53 ................................H9 SE-BL-0630-MTV8 ......................H5 SV-BHD-X024 ....................E11, F11
RCD-BC4-EA16 ...........................D8 RP-BL-CK54 ................................H9 SE-BL-0630-U001.......................H5 SV-BHD-X110 ....................E11, F11
RCD-BC0-EF16............................D8 RP-BL-CK55 ................................H9 SE-BL-1000-DTV3.......................H5 SV-BHD-X230 ....................E11, F11
RCD-BC0-EA06............................D8 RP-BL-CN10 ...............................H9 SE-BL-1000-MTV8 ......................H5 SV-BL-X024 ................................H8
RCD-BC0-EF06............................D8 RP-BL-CN20 ...............................H9 SE-BL-1000-U001.......................H5 SV-BL-X048 ................................H8
RCD-BC0-EA16 ...........................D8 RP-BL-CP10 ................................H9 SE-BL-1250-DTV3.......................H5 SV-BL-X110 ................................H8
RP-BC-CB10 .............................D14 RP-BL-CP11 ................................H9 SE-BL-1250-MTV8 ......................H5 SV-BL-X230 ................................H8
RP-BC-CD10 .............................D14 RP-BL-CH10 ...............................H9 SE-BL-1250-U001.......................H5 SV-BL-X400 ................................H8
RP-BC-CK10..............................D13 SE-BL-1600-DTV3.......................H5 SV-BL-X500 ................................H8
RP-BC-CK20 .............................D13 S SE-BL-1600-MTV8 ......................H5
RP-BC-CK21 .............................D13 SB-BL-0002 ................................H5 SE-BL-1600-U001.......................H5 Z
RP-BC-CK30 .............................D13 SE-BD-0100-4D01 ......................H6 SE-BL-1600-V001.......................H5 ZO-BD-0250-300 ........................E4
RP-BC-CK31 .............................D13 SE-BD-0100-DTV3 ......................E6 SE-BL-J1000-DTV3 .....................G5 ZO-BD-0250-400 ........................E5
RP-BC-CN10 .............................D13 SE-BD-0100-MTV8 .....................E6 SE-BL-J1000-MTV8.....................G5 ZO-BH-0630-300 ........................F4
RP-BC-CN11 .............................D13 SE-BD-0100-MTV9 .....................E6 SE-BL-J1000-U001 .....................G5 ZO-BH-0630-400 ........................F5
RP-BC-CN20 .............................D13 SE-BD-0160-4D01 ......................E6 SE-BL-J1000-V001......................G5 ZV-BD-0250-300 ........................E4
RP-BC-CN21 .............................D13 SE-BD-0160-DTV3 .....................E6 SE-BL-J315-DTV3 .......................G5 ZV-BD-0250-400 ........................E5
RP-BC-CP10 .............................D13 SE-BD-0160-L001 .....................E6 SE-BL-J315-MTV8 ......................G5 ZV-BH-0630-300 ........................F4
RP-BC-CP20 .............................D13 SE-BD-0160-MTV8 .....................E6 SE-BL-J315-U001 .......................G5 ZV-BH-0630-400 ........................F5
RP-BC-CP21 .............................D13 SE-BD-0160-MTV9 .....................E6 SE-BL-J630-DTV3 .......................G5 ZV-BL-1600-300...................G4, H4
RP-BC-CH10 .............................D13 SE-BD-0200-L001 .......................E6 SE-BL-J630-MTV8 ......................G5
RP-BC-CH20 .............................D13 SE-BD-0250-4D01 ......................E6 SE-BL-J630-U001 .......................G5
RP-BD-CK10..............................E12 SE-BD-0250-DTV3 ......................E6 SE-BL-J800-DTV3 .......................G5
T2
Modeion
NOTES
Modeion
NOTES
OEZ s.r.o.
Šedivská 339
561 51 Letohrad
Czech Republic
tel.: +420 465 672 111
+420 465 672 101
fax: +420 465 672 398
+420 465 672 151
e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com
www.oez.com
www.oez.com
www.oez.com

Any changes reserved
Modeion
MO01-2017-EN

OEZ - Circuit Breaker

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OEZ - Circuit Breaker

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

www.oez.

Moulded case circuit breakers

Any changes reserved

BD250N, BD250S ...........................................................................................................................................E

BH630N, BH630S ...........................................................................................................................................F

ACCESSORIES OF MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS..........................................................................P

OTHER TECHNICAL PARAMETERS...............................................................................................................R

More than 75 years of circuit breakers production

Own testing lab

CORE OF THE SWITCHBOARD

Remote controlled standby sources

Demanding working conditions

Simple work for an electrician

Quick direct connection of Cu/Al cables

Clear type designation

Type designation Rated current

Type BC160N BD250N, BD250S BH630N, BH630S BL1000S BL1600S

Rated normal current Iu 160 A 250 A 630 A 1 000 A 1 600 A

Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Utilization category (selectivity) A A A A, B A, B

Rated short-circuit ultimate Icu/Ue NORMAL 25 kA / AC 415 V 36 kA / AC 415 V 36 kA / AC 415 V – –

Rated short-time withstand current Icw/t – 2.5 kA /1 s 8 kA / 50 ms, 7 kA / 300 ms, 15 kA / 1 s 20 kA / 1 s

Residual current device z – – – –

Additional cover for overcurrent release – z z – –

Connection - front/rear z/z z/z z/z z/z z/z

Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early z/–/z/– z/z/z/z z/z/z/z z/z/–/– z/z/–/–

Lever with locking z z z z z

Mechanical interlocking z/– z/z z/z z/z z/z

Terminal cover IP20 z z z z z

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS BC160N

Circuit breakers ..........................................................................................................................................................................D4

Residual current devices .......................................................................................................................................................D8

Connecting sets for residual current device ..............................................................................................................D9

Residual current monitor .....................................................................................................................................................D9

Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................D9

Connecting sets .......................................................................................................................................................................D10

Mounting sets ...........................................................................................................................................................................D11

Shunt trips ..................................................................................................................................................................................D12

Undervoltage releases .........................................................................................................................................................D12

Delay unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................D13

Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................D13

Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................D14

Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................D14

Residual current devices

Connecting sets - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D18

Switches - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D43

Shunt trips - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D44

Hand drives - description, specifications ...................................................................................................................D46

Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching

Remote control and signalling

Safe operation - health protection

Circuit breaker package includes:

Characteristic N - only short-circuit release

Switch-disconnector package includes:

Ie [A] Typ Order code Weight [kg] Package [pc]

Circuit breaker package includes:

Circuit breaker package includes:

Circuit breaker package includes:

Ie [A] Type Order code Weight [kg] Package [pc]

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES 3P 4P

3-pole design, with interconnecting busbars

4-pole design, with interconnecting busbars

4-pole design, without interconnecting busbars

Circuit breakers ..........................................................................................................................................................................D4

Residual current devices .......................................................................................................................................................D8

Connecting sets for residual current device ..............................................................................................................D9

Residual current monitor .....................................................................................................................................................D9

Current transformers for residual current monitor ...............................................................................................D9

Connecting sets .......................................................................................................................................................................D10

Mounting sets ...........................................................................................................................................................................D11

Shunt trips ..................................................................................................................................................................................D12

Undervoltage releases .........................................................................................................................................................D12

Delay unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................D13

Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................D13

Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................D14

Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................D14

Residual current devices

Connecting sets - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D18

Switches - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D43

Shunt trips - specifications ......................................................................................................................................D44

Hand drives - description, specifications ...................................................................................................................D46

Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching